Eje y Transmision

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
TM
A
B
SECTION
TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION C
TM
E
CONTENTS
FS5R30A AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................... 19 F
Removal and Installation .........................................19
PRECAUTION ............................................... 7
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...... 21 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 7
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY .......................... 21
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Removal and Installation from Vehicle ....................21
SIONER" ................................................................... 7 H
Precaution for Work .................................................. 7 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 23
Service Notice or Precaution ..................................... 7
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY .......................... 23
Overhaul ..................................................................23 I
PREPARATION ............................................ 9
PREPARATION ................................................... 9 CASE COMPONENTS ...................................... 30
Special Service Tool ................................................. 9 Disassembly ............................................................30 J
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 11 Assembly .................................................................32
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 12 SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS ................... 35

Disassembly ............................................................35 K
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS Inspection ................................................................35
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................12 Assembly .................................................................36
NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 12 L
GEAR COMPONENTS ...................................... 37
DESCRIPTION ...................................................13 Disassembly ............................................................37
Description .............................................................. 13 Inspection ................................................................41
M
Assembly .................................................................43
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ......................... 14
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
M/T OIL ...............................................................14 (SDS) ............................................................ 53 N
Changing ................................................................. 14
Checking ................................................................. 14 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 53 O
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 15 General Specification ..............................................53
Gear End Play .........................................................54
REAR OIL SEAL ................................................15 Baulk Ring Clearance ..............................................54
Removal and Installation ......................................... 15 P
Available Snap Rings ..............................................54
POSITION SWITCH ............................................16 Available C-Rings ....................................................55
Checking ................................................................. 16 Available Thrust Washer .........................................55
Available Shims .......................................................55
SHIFT CONTROL ...............................................17 6MT: FS6R31A
Removal and Installation ......................................... 17
PRECAUTION .............................................. 56
Revision: May 2014 TM-1 2014 Frontier

PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 56 GEAR COMPONENTS ..................................... 102
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Disassembly .......................................................... 102
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Inspection .............................................................. 108
SIONER" ................................................................. 56 Assembly .............................................................. 111
Precaution for Work ................................................ 56
Service Notice or Precaution .................................. 56 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ......................................................... 125
PREPARATION ........................................... 58
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
PREPARATION ................................................. 58 (SDS) ................................................................ 125
Special Service Tool ............................................... 58 General Specification ............................................ 125
Commercial Service Tool ....................................... 60 Gear End Play ....................................................... 126
Snap Rings ........................................................... 126
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 62 Baulk Ring Clearance ........................................... 126
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS 5AT: RE5R05A
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................ 62
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ................................... 62
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 128
DESCRIPTION ................................................... 63 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 128

How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Cross-Sectional View ............................................. 63
Accurate Repair .................................................... 128
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ........................ 65 Diagnostic Work Sheet ......................................... 129
M/T OIL .............................................................. 65 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 131

Changing ................................................................ 65
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Checking ................................................................. 65
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ................................ 131
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 66 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY : Description ......... 131
REAR OIL SEAL ................................................ 66 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Removal and Installation ........................................ 66 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY : Special Repair
Requirement ......................................................... 131
POSITION SWITCH ........................................... 68
Checking ................................................................. 68 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 132
SHIFT CONTROL .............................................. 69 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 132
Removal and Installation ........................................ 69 Cross-Sectional View ............................................ 132
Shift Mechanism ................................................... 133
AIR BREATHER HOSE ..................................... 71 TCM Function ....................................................... 144
Removal and Installation ........................................ 71 CAN Communication ............................................ 145
Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................. 146
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ..... 72 Line Pressure Control ........................................... 146
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ........................... 72 Shift Control .......................................................... 148
Lock-up Control ..................................................... 149
Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD
Engine Brake Control ............................................ 150
Models) ................................................................... 72
Control Valve ........................................................ 150
Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD
A/T Electrical Parts Location ................................. 152
Models) ................................................................... 74
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .............................. 154
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 77
System Description ............................................... 154
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ........................... 77 Component Parts Location ................................... 154
Overhaul ................................................................. 77
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 155
CASE COMPONENTS ....................................... 83 Introduction ........................................................... 155
Disassembly ........................................................... 83 OBD-II Function for A/T System ........................... 155
Assembly ................................................................ 87 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II .......... 155
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................ 155
SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS ................... 94 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 156
Disassembly ........................................................... 94
Inspection ............................................................... 97 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ........................... 157
Assembly ................................................................ 97 CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION) ............... 157

Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT .............. 162 P0725 ENGINE SPEED .................................. 177
Description ............................................................. 177 A
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 165 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 177
U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A) ..... 165
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 177 B
Description ............................................................ 165
Possible Cause ...................................................... 177
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 165
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 177
Possible Cause ..................................................... 165
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 177
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 165 C
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 165 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO ................... 179
Description ............................................................. 179
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 166
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 179 TM
Description ............................................................ 166
Possible Cause ...................................................... 179
Possible Cause ..................................................... 166
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 166 E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 166 P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO ................... 181
Description ............................................................. 181
P0615 STARTER RELAY ................................ 167
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 181 F
Description ............................................................ 167
Possible Cause ...................................................... 181
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 167
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 182 G
Possible Cause ..................................................... 167 P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO ................... 183
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 167 Description ............................................................. 183
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 167 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 183 H
Possible Cause ...................................................... 183
P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL ................ 169
Description ............................................................ 169
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 184 I
Possible Cause ..................................................... 169 P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO ................... 185
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 169 Description ............................................................. 185
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 169 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 185 J
Possible Cause ...................................................... 185
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A.. 170
Description ............................................................ 170
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 186 K
Mode ..................................................................... 170 P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO ................... 187
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 170 Description ............................................................. 187
Possible Cause ..................................................... 170 L
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 187
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 170 Possible Cause ...................................................... 187
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 187
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 188 M
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A ................... 172
Description ............................................................ 172 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ...................... 189
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Description ............................................................. 189
Mode ..................................................................... 172 N
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 172 Mode ...................................................................... 189
Possible Cause ..................................................... 172 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 189
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 172 Possible Cause ...................................................... 189 O
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR .................. 174
Description ............................................................ 174 P
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER ...................... 191
Mode ..................................................................... 174 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 174 Mode ...................................................................... 191
Possible Cause ..................................................... 174 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 191
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 174 Possible Cause ...................................................... 191

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................191 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 206
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A. 193 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 206
Description .............................................................193 Possible Cause ..................................................... 206
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 206
Mode ......................................................................193 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 206
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................193
Possible Cause ......................................................193 P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID ................. 208
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................193 Description ............................................................ 208
Mode ..................................................................... 208
P1705 TP SENSOR ......................................... 195 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 208
Possible Cause ......................................................195 P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID .............. 210
Mode ..................................................................... 210
P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA- On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 210
TURE SENSOR ............................................... 197 Possible Cause ..................................................... 210
Description .............................................................197 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 210
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 210
Mode ......................................................................197
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................197 P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
Possible Cause ......................................................197 SOLENOID ....................................................... 212
Component Inspection ...........................................199 Mode ..................................................................... 212
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 200 Possible Cause ..................................................... 212
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 212
Mode ......................................................................200
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................200 P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID ....... 214
Possible Cause ......................................................200 Description ............................................................ 214
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................200 CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................200 Mode ..................................................................... 214
P1730 INTERLOCK ......................................... 202 Possible Cause ..................................................... 214
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................202 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 214
Possible Cause ......................................................202
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................202 P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID ....... 216
Judgment of Interlock ............................................202 Description ............................................................ 216
Mode ..................................................................... 216
P1731 1ST ENGINE BRAKING ....................... 204 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 216
Possible Cause ......................................................204 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................204 CUIT .................................................................. 218
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................204 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 218
P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID ................ 206 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE
Description .............................................................206 OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT .......... 220

CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...................... 269
Mode ..................................................................... 220 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 220 A/T FLUID ....................................................... 269
Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF) ................................ 269
BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................... 221 Changing the A/T Fluid (ATF) ................................ 271
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor B
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ..................................... 272
Mode ..................................................................... 221
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 221 INSPECTIONS BEFORE TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSIS .............................................................. 275 C
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .............................. 222 Fluid Condition Check ........................................... 275
Description ............................................................ 222 Stall Test ................................................................ 275
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 222 Line Pressure Test ................................................ 276 TM
OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH ................... 224 ROAD TEST .................................................... 279
Mode ..................................................................... 224 Check Before Engine Is Started ............................ 279 E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 224 Check at Idle .......................................................... 279
Cruise Test - Part 1 ............................................... 280
1ST POSITION SWITCH .................................. 226
Cruise Test - Part 2 ............................................... 282 F
Cruise Test - Part 3 ............................................... 282
Mode ..................................................................... 226
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 226 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 284
G
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 228 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM ............................ 284
Exploded view ....................................................... 284
TCM .................................................................. 228
Removal and Installation ....................................... 284 H
Reference Value ................................................... 228
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 285
Fail-Safe ................................................................ 230
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 231 OIL PAN .......................................................... 286
DTC No. Index ...................................................... 231 Removal and Installation ....................................... 286 I
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 233 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM ....................... 288
Removal and Installation ....................................... 288 J
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 233
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 233 REAR OIL SEAL ............................................. 296
Removal and Installation ....................................... 296
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .............................. 240 K
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 240 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE .............................. 297
Component ............................................................ 297
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 242 Removal and Installation ....................................... 297 L
SYSTEM SYMPTOM ........................................ 242 AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................. 300
Symptom Chart ..................................................... 242 Removal and Installation for QR25DE Engine ...... 300
Removal and Installation for VQ40DE Engine ....... 300 M
PRECAUTION ............................................ 264
A/T FLUID COOLER ....................................... 303
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 264
Removal and Installation ....................................... 303
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System N
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 304
SIONER" ............................................................... 264
Precaution for Work .............................................. 264 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ........................ 304 O
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System Component ............................................................ 304
of A/T and Engine ................................................. 264 Removal and Installation for QR25DE ................... 306
Precaution ............................................................. 265 Removal and Installation for VQ40DE 2WD Mod-
Service Notice or Precaution ................................. 266 P
els .......................................................................... 308
Removal and Installation for VQ40DE 4WD Mod-
PREPARATION ......................................... 267 els .......................................................................... 310
PREPARATION ................................................ 267 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . 313
Special Service Tool ............................................. 267
Commercial Service Tool ...................................... 268 OVERHAUL ..................................................... 313
Exploded View ....................................................... 313

Oil Channel ............................................................320 DIRECT CLUTCH ............................................. 360
Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Direct Clutch ......................................................... 360
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ...........................322
ASSEMBLY ...................................................... 363
DISASSEMBLY ............................................... 324 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 363
Disassembly ..........................................................324 Adjustment ............................................................ 376
Assembly (2) ......................................................... 379
OIL PUMP ........................................................ 343
Exploded View .......................................................343 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................343 (SDS) ......................................................... 385
FRONT SUN GEAR, 3RD ONE-WAY SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
CLUTCH ........................................................... 346 (SDS) ................................................................ 385
Exploded View .......................................................346 General Specification ............................................ 385
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................346 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ..... 385
FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releas-
es .......................................................................... 386
INTERNAL GEAR ............................................ 348
Stall Speed ............................................................ 387
Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear .....348
Line Pressure ........................................................ 387
MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 387
AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB ............. 353 Input Speed Sensor .............................................. 388
Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Re- Output Speed Sensor ........................................... 388
verse Clutch Hub ...................................................353 Reverse brake ....................................................... 388
Total End Play ....................................................... 388
HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH ............ 358
High and Low Reverse Clutch ...............................358

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [FS5R30A]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010152372
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. TM
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni-
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a I
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the J
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000009480406
K
• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
L
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one. M
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
N
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Oily dirt: O
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off. P
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000009480407
• Do not reuse transmission oil once it has been drained.

• Check oil level or replace oil with vehicle on level surface.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [FS5R30A]
• During removal or installation, keep inside of transmission clear of dust or dirt.
• Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are required, be
certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied to.
• In principle, tighten nuts and bolts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If
tightening sequence is specified, use it.
• Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [FS5R30A]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000009480408
B
The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
ST23540000 Removing and installing retaining pin
(J-25689-A) a: 2.3 mm (0.091 in) dia. TM
Pin punch b: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
NT442
ST30031000 • Removing 1st and 2nd synchronizer as- F

(J-22912-01) sembly
Puller • Removing counter gear rear thrust bearing
• Removing main drive bearing
G
• Inspecting baulk ring wear
a: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia.
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
NT411
H
ST33290001 Removing rear oil seal

(J-34286)
Puller I
WMT066
ST33230000 Removing counter gear

K
( — ) a: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia.
Drift b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
NT084
M
ST22350000 Removing counter gear front bearing (Use
(J-25678-01) with KV38100300)
Drift a: 34 mm (1.34 in) dia.
b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia. N
O
NT065
KV38100300 • Removing counter gear front bearing (Use

(J-25523) with ST22350000) P
Drift • Installing counter gear rear bearing
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
b: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
NT084

PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
ST30720000 • Removing and installing mainshaft front
1. ( — ) bearing
2. (J-25405) • Installing rear oil seal
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
NT115
ST33210000 • Installing counter gear front bearing

1. (J-25523) • Installing front cover oil seal
2. (J-25803-01) a: 44 mm (1.73 in) dia.
Drift b: 24.5 mm (0.965 in) dia.
NT084
ST30613000 Installing main drive gear bearing

(J-25742-3) a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
Drift b: 48 mm (1.89 in) dia.
NT073
ST37750000 • Removing counter gear rear bearing

1. (J-25863-01) • Installing OD gear bushing
2. (J-34332) • Installing reverse cone
3. (J-34334) • Installing reverse counter gear
4. (J-25679-01) • Installing counter gear rear end bearing
b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
NT065
ST22452000 Installing reverse synchronizer hub

(J-34337) a: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
NT065
— Installing mainshaft and counter gear (Use

(J-26349-3) with J-34328)
Puller leg
NT078
— Installing mainshaft and counter gear (Use

(J-34328) with J-26349-3)
Puller
NT079

PREPARATION
(TechMate No.) A
Tool name
— • Installing OD main gear
(J-34342) • Installing reverse gear bushing B
Drift a: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
b: 40.5 mm (1.594 in) dia.
NT065
— Removing and installing mainshaft rear bear- TM

(J-26349-A) ing (Use with J-25726-B)
Bearing Remover and Installer Set
E
WMT065 F
— Removing and installing mainshaft rear bear-
(J-25726-B) ing (Use with J-26349-A)
Puller G
H
ZZA0010D
— Removing trim components

(J-46534) I
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
K
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000009480409
L
Tool name Description
Puller • Removing counter gear rear end bearing
• Removing reverse synchronizer hub M
• Removing reverse cone
• Removing reverse gear bushing
• Removing reverse counter gear
N
NT077
Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts O
PIIB1407E

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [FS5R30A]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000009480410
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the problem. The numbers indicate the order of the inspec-
tion. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
TM-14
TM-23
TM-23
TM-23
Reference page
CHECK PLUG RETURN SPRING AND CHECK BALL (Worn or damaged)

SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)
BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)

BEARING (Worn or damaged)
OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)
INSERT SPRING (Damaged)

O-RING (Worn or damaged)
GEAR (Worn or damaged)

GASKET (Damaged)
SHIFT FORK (Worn)

OIL (Level too high)
OIL (Level low)
OIL (Wrong)
Noise 1 2 3 3
Oil leakage 3 1 2 2 2
Symptom
Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 2
Jumps out of gear 1 2 2

DESCRIPTION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [FS5R30A]
DESCRIPTION
A
Description INFOID:0000000009480411
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW B
TM
PCIB1296E
N
1. Release bearing sleeve 2. Front cover 3. Main drive gear
4. 3rd and 4th shift fork 5. Transmission case 6. 3rd and 4th coupling sleeve
7. Striking interlock 8. 3rd main gear 9. 2nd main gear O
10. 1st main gear 11. OD main gear 12. Striking rod
13. Reverse shift fork 14. Shift selector 15. Mainshaft
16. Mainshaft rear bearing 17. Counter gear rear end bearing 18. Reverse main gear P
19. Rear extension 20. OD counter gear 21. Adapter plate
22. Mainshaft front bearing 23. Drain plug 24. 1st and 2nd coupling sleeve
25. Counter gear 26. Sub-gear bracket 27. Counter gear front bearing
28. Main drive gear bearing 29. Main drive gear

M/T OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [FS5R30A]
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
M/T OIL
Changing INFOID:0000000009480412
DRAINING
1. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transmission.
2. Stop the engine. Remove the transmission drain plug and drain the oil.
3. Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it to the transmission. Tighten the drain plug to the specified
torque. Refer to TM-23, "Overhaul".
CAUTION:
Do no reuse gasket.
FILLING
1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new oil until oil level reaches the
specified limit near the filler plug hole.
Oil grade and Viscosity:

Refer to MA-16, "FOR USA AND CANADA : Flu-
ids and Lubricants".
Oil capacity:
Refer to MA-16, "FOR USA AND CANADA : Flu-
ids and Lubricants".
PCIB0268E
2. After refilling the oil, check oil level. Set a gasket to the filler
plug, then install it to the transmission. Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-23,
"Overhaul".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
Checking INFOID:0000000009480413
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL

1. Make sure that oil is not leaking from the transmission or around it.
2. Check oil level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Set a gasket on the filler plug and install it to the transmission.
Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-23,
"Overhaul".
CAUTION:
PCIB0268E

REAR OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FS5R30A]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

REAR OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009480414
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-143, "Removal C
and Installation".
2. Remove the rear oil seal using Tool.
TM
Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse rear oil seal. E
WCIA0176E F
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
• Drive the new oil seal straight until it stops using Tool. G
Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405)

H
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse rear oil seal.
• Apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips before installing.
• Do not incline rear oil seal during installation. I
• Check the transmission oil level after installation. Refer to TM-14,
"Checking".
WCIA0493E
J

POSITION SWITCH
POSITION SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH

• Check continuity.
Gear position Continuity

Reverse Yes
Except reverse No
SMT981D
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH


Neutral Yes
Except neutral No

SHIFT CONTROL
SHIFT CONTROL
A
COMPONENTS B
TM
AWDIA0626ZZ
M
1. Retaining plate 2. Dust boot cover (upper) 3. Dust boot cover (lower)
4. Shift selector handle 5. Shift selector assembly 6. Clip A
7. Boot 8. Clip B 9. Snap ring N
REMOVAL
1. Remove the shift selector handle. O
2. Remove the cup holder finisher and shift bezel. Refer to IP-29, "Exploded View".
3. Remove the retaining plate and dust boot covers.
4. Remove the clip B and then separate the boot from the control housing. P
5. Remove the snap ring.
6. Remove the shift selector assembly from the transmission.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the clips and snap ring.

SHIFT CONTROL
• Apply cement to threads of the shift selector assembly.
• When shift selector assembly is moved to each position, make sure there is no binding or discon-
nection in either boot.

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
COMPONENTS B
TM
LCIA0380E
M
1. Air breather hose 2. Harness 3. Breather tube
4. Clip
N
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect air breather hose from breather tube and transmission harness connector.
2. Bend the clip away from the transmission housing and remove air breather hose. O
3. Remove the clip bolt and remove the clip from the transmission housing, if necessary.
4. Remove the breather tube bolt and the breather tube.
INSTALLATION P
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Make sure there are no pinched or blocked areas on the air breather hose after installation.
• When inserting the air breather hose, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the end of the tube
radius.
• Install the air breather hose with the paint mark side up.
• Install the air breather hose and harness to the clip to prevent separation.

AIR BREATHER HOSE
• Push the clip so that the harness contacts the clip bolt.

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FS5R30A]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

Removal and Installation from Vehicle INFOID:0000000009480418
B
COMPONENTS
C
TM
AWDIA0627GB
1. Breather hose 2. Transmission assembly 3. Dust cover

4. Crossmember 5. Insulator A. Refer to INSTALLATION
NOTE:

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FS5R30A]
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill-
ing.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Refer to PG-83, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-17, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-174, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the gusset.
5. Disconnect harness connector from the heated oxygen sensor and remove wire harness from transmis-
sion.
6. Disconnect harness connectors from the back-up lamp switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
7. Remove the clutch operating cylinder from the transmission. Refer to CL-14, "5M/T : Removal and Instal-
lation".
8. Remove the starter motor. Refer to STR-35, "Removal and Installation (QR25DE)".
9. Support the transmission using a suitable jack.
10. Remove the transmission dust cover.
11. Remove the transmission to engine bolts.
12. Remove the nuts securing the insulator to the crossmember.
13. Remove the transmission crossmember using power tool.
WARNING:
Support the transmission using suitable jack.
14. Remove the air breather hose and breather tube. Refer to TM-19, "Removal and Installation".
15. Separate the transmission from the engine and remove it from the vehicle.
WARNING:
Support manual transmission while removing it using suitable jack.
INSTALLATION
• When installing the transmission to the engine, install the bolts in
accordance with the standard below.
Bolt No. 1 2 3
Quantity 4 1 6
Bolt length “ ”
60 (2.36) 65 (2.56)
mm (in)
Tightening torque
35 (3.6, 26) 75 (7.7, 55)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
CAUTION: WCIA0505E
• When installing be careful to avoid interference between transmission main drive gear and clutch
cover.
• When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly
during re-assembly.
• Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration oil leaks or breakage of driv-
etrain components.
• After installation, check for oil leakage and oil level. Refer to TM-14, "Checking".

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [FS5R30A]
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A

Overhaul INFOID:0000000009480419
B
EXPLODED VIEW
C
TM
PCIB1281E

1. Back-up lamp switch 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 3. Clip

4. Plug 5. Dust cover 6. Rear oil seal
7. Rear extension 8. Rear extension bolt 9. Bearing retainer bolt
10. Slide ball bearing 11. Drain plug 12. Gasket
13. Front cover oil seal 14. Front cover bolt 15. Washer
16. Ball pin 17. Front cover 18. Gasket
19. Slide ball bearing 20. Transmission case 21. Filler plug
22. Air breather 23. Adapter plate 24. Bearing retainer
GEAR COMPONENTS

TM
PCIB1282E
P
1. Main drive gear bearing snap ring 2. Main drive gear snap ring 3. Main drive gear bearing
4. Main drive gear 5. Pilot bearing 6. Spacer
7. Mainshaft front snap ring 8. 4th baulk ring 9. 3rd and 4th coupling sleeve
10. Shifting insert 11. Spread spring 12. 3rd and 4th synchronizer hub
13. 3rd outer baulk ring 14. Synchronizer cone 15. 3rd inner baulk ring
16. 3rd main gear 17. 3rd gear needle bearing 18. Steel ball (For 1st gear washer)

19. Mainshaft 20. Counter gear front bearing 21. Counter gear front bearing shim
22. Counter gear front thrust bearing 23. Sub-gear snap ring 24. Sub-gear bracket
25. Steel ball 26. Counter gear 27. Counter gear rear thrust bearing
28. 2nd main gear 29. 2nd gear needle bearing 30. 2nd inner baulk ring
31. 2nd outer baulk ring 32. 1st and 2nd synchronizer hub 33. 1st and 2nd coupling sleeve
34. 1st baulk ring 35. 1st main gear 36. 1st gear needle bearing
37. 1st gear bushing 38. 1st gear washer

TM
PCIB1283E
P
1. Mainshaft front bearing 2. Mainshaft front bearing snap ring 3. OD main gear
4. Reverse gear bushing 5. Reverse main gear 6. Reverse gear needle bearings
7. Reverse synchronizer hub 8. Reverse coupling sleeve 9. Mainshaft spacer
10. Mainshaft rear bearing 11. Mainshaft C-ring 12. C-ring holder
13. Mainshaft rear snap ring 14. Counter gear rear bearing 15. OD gear bushing
16. OD gear needle bearing 17. OD counter gear 18. OD coupling sleeve

19. Spring insert 20. Reverse cone 21. Reverse baulk ring
22. OD baulk ring 23. Reverse counter gear 24. Counter gear rear end bearing
25. Counter gear rear snap ring 26. Retaining pin 27. Reverse idler shaft
28. Reverse idler needle bearings 29. Reverse idler gear 30. Reverse idler thrust washer
SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS
PCIB1284E

1. Snap ring 2. Socket 3. Spring A

4. Shift selector handle 5. Shift selector 6. Upper boot retainer
7. Boot 8. Lower boot retainer 9. Control housing bolt
10. Washer 11. Control housing 12. Bushing B
13. Return spring 14. Check ball 15. Select check plunger
16. Select check spring (small) 17. Select check spring (large) 18. Select check plug
19. Select check spring 20. Retaining pin 21. Guide plate bolt C
22. Guide plate 23. Striking arm 24. O-ring
25. Reverse check sleeve 26. Reverse check sleeve bolt 27. OD rod bracket
28. OD shift fork 29. OD fork rod 30. 1st and 2nd shift fork TM
31. Striking interlock 32. Striking lever 33. 3rd and 4th shift fork
34. Stopper ring 35. Interlock stopper bolt 36. Clip
37. Interlock stopper 38. Striking rod 39. OD and reverse fork rod E
40. Reverse shift fork

CASE COMPONENTS
CASE COMPONENTS
Disassembly INFOID:0000000009480420
1. Remove interlock stopper bolt, washer and clip and then remove
interlock stopper using suitable tool.
PCIB1337E
2. Remove control housing, return spring and check ball.

CAUTION:
Do not lose check ball.
SMT367A
3. Drive out retaining pin from striking arm using Tool.
Tool number : ST23540000 (J-25689-A)
SMT368A
4. Remove rear extension together with striking arm by tapping

lightly.
SMT135C

CASE COMPONENTS
5. Remove front cover and gasket using suitable tool.
A
SMT370A
TM
6. Remove stopper ring and main drive bearing snap ring using
suitable tool.
E
G
SMT371A
7. Remove transmission case by tapping lightly using suitable tool.

H
8. Remove counter gear front bearing shim and counter gear front
bearing.
I
SMT372A
K
9. Remove front cover oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage front cover. L
N
SMT392A

CASE COMPONENTS
Assembly INFOID:0000000009480421
1. Install new front cover oil seal using Tool.
Tool number : ST33210000 (J-25803-01)

CAUTION:
• Apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
• Do not reuse front cover oil seal.
2. Install selected counter gear new front bearing shim onto trans-
mission case.
CAUTION:
• Apply multi-purpose grease to counter gear front bearing
shim and counter gear front bearing. SMT393A
• Do not reuse counter gear front bearing and counter gear front bearing shim.
3. Apply sealant to mating surface of transmission case.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or the equivalent. Refer to GI-21, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants".
4. Install gear assembly onto transmission case.
SMT588A
5. Install interlock stopper to transmission case.

6. Install clip and washer to interlock stopper bolt, and then install
to transmission case. Tighten to the specified torque.
Interlock stopper bolt Refer to TM-23, "Overhaul"
PCIB1285E
7. Install stopper ring, new snap ring and new main drive bearing
snap ring using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the snap rings.
SMT371A

CASE COMPONENTS
8. Install front cover and gasket.
CAUTION: A
Do not reuse bolts indicated as (A) shown.
Bolt length “ ” Tightening torque B

Bolt symbol
mm (in) N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
(A) 35 (1.38)
(B) 30 (1.18) 16-20 (1.6-2.1, 12-15) C
(C) 50 (1.97)
PCIB1288E
9. Apply sealant to mating surface of adapter plate. TM
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or the equivalent. Refer to GI-21, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants".
10. Install rear extension together with striking arm. E
Rear extension bolts Refer to TM-23, "Overhaul"

F
SMT461A
H
11. Install new retaining pin into striking arm using Tool.
I
Tool number : ST23540000 (J-25689-A)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse retaining pin. J
SMT368A
L
12. Install check ball and return spring.
13. Apply sealant to mating surface of rear extension, and then
install control housing.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or the equivalent. Refer to GI- M
21, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
O
SMT462A

CASE COMPONENTS
14. Tighten control housing bolts to the specified torque.
Bolt head size

(A) bolts : 12 mm (0.47 in)
(B) bolts : 13 mm (0.51 in)
Control housing bolts Refer to TM-23, "Overhaul"
PCIB1289E

A
1. Mount adapter plate on vise using copper plates to protect B

adapter plate.
2. Remove OD and reverse fork rod.
C
TM
SMT373A E
3. Drive out retaining pin from striking lever using Tool.

F
Tool number : ST23540000 (J-25689-A)
4. While pulling out striking rod, remove striking lever and striking
interlock. Then remove 1st and 2nd, 3rd and 4th, and reverse G
shift forks.
SMT374A
I
5. Drive out retaining pin from OD shift fork using Tool.
Tool number : ST23540000 (J-25689-A)

J
6. Pull out OD fork rod and then remove OD shift fork.
L
SMT375A
Inspection INFOID:0000000009480423
M
• Check contact surface and sliding surface for wear, scratches, pro-
jections or other damage.
N
P
SMT398A

1. Install OD fork rod and OD shift fork. Then install new retaining
pin into OD shift fork.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse retaining pin.
SMT457A
2. Install 1st and 2nd, 3rd and 4th, and reverse shift forks onto coupling sleeve.
3. Install striking rod into hole of shift forks, striking lever and inter-
lock and then install new retaining pin into striking lever using
Tool.
Tool number : ST23540000 (J-25689-A)

CAUTION:
• Make sure that striking rod moves smoothly.
• Do not reuse retaining pin.
4. Apply sealant to thread of OD and reverse fork rod bolt, and
then install OD and reverse fork rod.
SMT374A
OD and reverse fork rod bolt Refer to TM-23, "Overhaul"

• Use Genuine Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant or the equivalent. Refer to GI-21, "Rec-
ommended Chemical Products and Sealants".

GEAR COMPONENTS
GEAR COMPONENTS
A
1. Before removing gears and shafts, measure each gear end play. B
Refer to TM-54, "Gear End Play".
• If not within specification, disassemble and check contact sur-
face of gear to hub, washer, bushing, needle bearing and
C
shaft.
TM
SMT376A E
2. Remove rear side components on mainshaft and counter gear.

a. Remove reverse coupling sleeve. F
SMT463A
I
b. Remove mainshaft rear snap ring and counter gear rear snap
ring using suitable tool.
c. Remove C-ring holder and mainshaft C-rings from mainshaft
using suitable tool. J
L
SMT377A
d. Remove counter gear rear end bearing using suitable tool.

e. Remove reverse idler thrust washer, reverse idler gear and M
reverse idler needle bearings.
f. Remove mainshaft rear bearing using Tools.
N
Tool number : — (J-26349-A)
: — (J-25726-B)
O
SMT378A
P

GEAR COMPONENTS
g. Remove reverse main gear together with mainshaft spacer and
reverse synchronizer hub using suitable tool. Then remove
reverse gear needle bearings.
SMT380A
h. Remove reverse counter gear using suitable tool.

i. Remove OD coupling sleeve together with OD baulk ring,
reverse baulk ring and spring inserts.
SMT773A
j. Remove reverse gear bushing using suitable tool.
SMT770A
k. Remove OD counter gear and reverse cone using suitable tool.

l. Remove OD gear needle bearing.
m. Remove reverse idler shaft.
SMT771A
3. Press out mainshaft, OD main gear, OD gear bushing and counter gear alternately using Tool.
Tool number : ST33230000 ( — )

GEAR COMPONENTS
TM
AMT174A
F
4. Remove front side components on mainshaft.
a. Remove 1st gear washer and steel ball using suitable tool.
CAUTION: G
Be careful not to lose steel ball.
b. Remove 1st main gear and 1st gear needle bearing.
H
I
SMT383A
c. Press out 2nd main gear together with 1st gear bushing and 1st
and 2nd synchronizer assembly using Tool. J
Tool number : ST30031000 (J-22912-01)

K
d. Remove 2nd gear needle bearing.
e. Remove mainshaft front snap ring.
L
SMT482C
M
f. Press out 3rd main gear together with 3rd and 4th synchronizer
assembly.
g. Remove 3rd gear needle bearing. N
P
SMT385A

GEAR COMPONENTS
5. Remove front side components on counter gear.
a. Remove counter gear rear thrust bearing using Tool.
Tool number : ST30031000 (J-22912-01)
SMT404A
b. Remove sub-gear snap ring, sub-gear bracket and steel ball

using suitable tool.
SMT470A
6. Remove main drive gear bearing.

a. Remove spacer and pilot bearing.
b. Remove main drive gear snap ring.
c. Press out main drive gear bearing using Tool.
Tool number : ST30031000 (J-22912-01)
SMT420A
7. Remove bearing retainer.

8. Remove bearings from case components using Tools.
Tool number : ST22350000 (J-25678-01)

: KV38100300 (J-25523)
: ST30720000 ( — )
: ST37750000 (J-5863-01)

GEAR COMPONENTS
TM
PCIB1286E
9. Remove mainshaft front bearing snap ring from mainshaft front bearing. F
G
GEARS AND SHAFTS
• Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending.
H
SMT386A
K
• Check gears for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
N
SMT423A
SYNCHRONIZERS
• Check spline portion of coupling sleeves, hubs, and gears for wear O
or cracks.
• Check baulk rings for cracks or deformation.
• Check shifting inserts for wear or deformation. P
• Check insert springs for deformation.
SMT427C

GEAR COMPONENTS
• Measure wear of main drive, 1st and OD baulk rings. Refer to TM-
54, "Baulk Ring Clearance".
• If the clearance is smaller than the wear limit, replace baulk ring.
SMT140
• Measure wear of 2nd and 3rd double baulk rings using Tool.
Tool number : ST30031000 (J-22912-01)

- Place baulk rings in position on synchronizer cone.
- While holding baulk rings against synchronizer cone as far as it will
go, measure the dimensions (A) and (B).
Standard
Dimension (A) : 0.7 - 0.9 mm (0.028 - 0.035 in)
Dimension (B) : 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in) SCIA1046E
Wear limit : 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
• If the dimension (A) or (B) is smaller than the wear limit, replace
outer baulk ring, inner baulk ring and synchronizer cone as a set.
SCIA1084E
• Measure wear of reverse baulk ring.

- Place baulk ring in position on reverse cone.
- While holding baulk ring against reverse cone as far as it will go,
measure the dimension (A) with dial indicator.
Standard
Dimension (A) : 0.35 - 0.95 mm (0.0138 -0.0374 in)
Wear limit : 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
- If the dimension (A) is larger than the wear limit, replace baulk ring.
SMT424A
BEARINGS

GEAR COMPONENTS
• Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, crack, pit-
ting or wear. A
SMT418A
TM
1. Install mainshaft front bearing snap ring to mainshaft front bearing.

E
2. Install bearings into case components using Tools.
Tool number : ST33210000 (J-25523)

F
: ST30720000 ( — )
: KV38100300 (J-25523)
G
L
PCIB1287E
3. Install bearing retainer. Tighten bearing retainer bolts to the specified torque.
M
Bearing retainer bolts Refer to TM-23, "Overhaul"
4. Install main drive gear bearing.
a. Press main drive gear bearing using Tool. N
Tool number : ST30613000 (J-25742-3)

O
SMT425A

GEAR COMPONENTS
b. Select proper main drive gear snap ring to minimize clearance of
groove. Refer to TM-54, "Available Snap Rings".
End play Refer to TM-54, "Gear

End Play"
CAUTION:
Do not reuse main drive gear snap ring.
c. Install selected new main drive gear snap ring on main drive
gear.
SMT426A
5. Install front side components on mainshaft.

a. Assemble 1st and 2nd synchronizer.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse 1st and 2nd synchronizer hub.
SMT614B
b. Assemble 3rd and 4th synchronizer.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse 3rd and 4th synchronizer hub.
SMT615B
c. Press on 3rd and 4th synchronizer assembly together with 3rd

main gear and 3rd gear needle bearing.
CAUTION:
Pay attention to direction of synchronizer assembly.
SMT399A
d. Select proper mainshaft front snap ring to minimize clearance of

groove. Refer to TM-54, "Available Snap Rings".
End play : 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)

CAUTION:
Do not reuse mainshaft front snap ring.
e. Install selected new mainshaft front snap ring on mainshaft.
SMT400A

GEAR COMPONENTS
f. Press on 1st and 2nd synchronizer assembly together with 2nd
main gear and 2nd gear needle bearing. A
CAUTION:
Pay attention to direction of synchronizer assembly.
B
SMT401A
TM
g. Press on 1st gear bushing using 1st gear washer.
G
SMT402A
h. Install 1st main gear and 1st gear needle bearing. H

i. Install steel ball and 1st gear washer.
CAUTION:
Apply multi-purpose grease to steel ball and 1st gear I
washer before installing.
K
SMT403A
6. Install components on counter gear. L

a. Install steel ball, sub-gear bracket and new sub-gear snap ring.
CAUTION:
• Apply multi-purpose grease to steel ball.
• Do not reuse sub-gear snap ring. M
b. Install counter gear rear thrust bearing using a brass drift.

CAUTION: N
Be careful not to damage counter gear rear thrust bearing.
SMT405A

GEAR COMPONENTS
7. Select proper counter gear front bearing shim when replacing
transmission case, counter gear, counter gear rear thrust bear-
ing or sub-gear bracket.
a. Install counter gear, counter gear front thrust bearing and
counter gear rear thrust bearing on adapter plate.
b. Place adapter plate and counter gear assembly in transmission
case (case inverted).
PCIB1290E
c. Tighten adapter plate to transmission case using 2 bolts.

d. Place dial indicator on rear end of counter gear.
e. Move counter gear up and down and measure dial indicator
deflection.
f. Select proper counter gear front bearing shim using the table as
a guide. Refer to TM-55, "Available Shims".
End play : 0.10 - 0.26 mm (0.0039 - 0.0102 in)

g. Separate adapter plate and transmission case.
h. Remove counter gear assembly.
SMT578A

GEAR COMPONENTS
8. Select proper reverse idler thrust washer when replacing rear
extension, reverse idler gear or reverse idler shaft. A
a. Install reverse idler thrust washer, reverse idler gear, reverse
idler needle bearings and reverse idler shaft into rear extension.
• When replacing reverse idler thrust washer, install either B
(A or B). Refer to TM-55, "Available Thrust Washer".
TM
G
PCIB1291E
b. Place dial indicator on front end of reverse idler shaft.

H
c. Put straightedge on front surface of rear extension as a stopper
of reverse idler shaft.
d. Move reverse idler shaft up and down and measure end play.
I
End play Refer to TM-55, "Available Thrust Washer"
e. If not within specification, replace reverse idler thrust washer J
with the other (A or B) and check again.
N
SMT433A
9. Install mainshaft and counter gear on adapter plate and main

O
drive gear on mainshaft.
a. Mount adapter plate on vise and apply multi-purpose grease to
counter gear rear bearing.
P
SMT438A

GEAR COMPONENTS
b. Partially install mainshaft on mainshaft front bearing using suit-
able tool.
CAUTION:
To allow for installation of counter gear, do not install main-
shaft completely.
SMT440A
c. Install counter gear in counter gear rear bearing and install main
drive gear, pilot bearing and spacer on mainshaft.
SMT441A
NOTE:
When installing counter gear into counter gear rear bearing,
push up on upper roller of counter gear rear bearing using suit-
able tool.
SMT442A
d. Install Tool onto adapter plate and mainshaft C-ring and C-ring
holder on mainshaft.
Tool number : — (J-26349-3)

e. Install Tool on mainshaft.
Tool number : — (J-34328)
PCIB1292E

GEAR COMPONENTS
f. Install mainshaft and counter gear completely by extending
length of Tool. A
SMT579A
TM
10. Install rear side components on mainshaft and counter gear.
a. Install new OD gear bushing using Tool while pushing on the
front of counter gear. E
Tool number : ST37750000 (J-34332)

CAUTION: F
Do not reuse OD gear bushing.
G
SMT444A
b. Install OD main gear using Tool.

H
CAUTION: I
Pay attention to direction of OD main gear. [(B) is wider
than (A) as shown].
c. Install adapter plate with gear assembly onto transmission case.
J
d. Install OD gear needle bearing and then install OD counter gear
and reverse idler shaft.
SMT580AA
K
e. Install new reverse gear bushing using Tool.
Tool number : — (J-34342) L
CAUTION:
Do not reuse reverse gear bushing.
M
N
PCIB1293E
f. Install reverse cone using Tool. O
Tool number : ST37750000 (J-34332)

P
SMT582A

GEAR COMPONENTS
g. Install spring inserts and reverse baulk ring on OD coupling
sleeve. Then install them and OD baulk ring on OD counter
gear.
CAUTION:
Pay attention to direction of OD coupling sleeve.
PCIB1294E
SMT583A
h. Install reverse counter gear using Tool.
Tool number : ST37750000 (J-34334)

i. Install reverse gear needle bearings, reverse idler needle bear-
ings and then install reverse main gear, reverse idler gear and
selected reverse idler thrust washer.
SMT584A
j. Install new reverse synchronizer hub using Tool.
Tool number : ST22452000 (J-34337)

CAUTION:
• Pay attention to direction of reverse synchronizer hub.
• Do not reuse reverse synchronizer hub.
k. Install mainshaft spacer and mainshaft rear bearing using Tools.
Tool number : — (J-26349-A)

: — (J-25726-B) SMT585A
l. Install counter gear rear end bearing using Tool.
Tool number : ST37750000 (J-25679-01)

m. Separate adapter plate from transmission case and mount
adapter plate on vise again.
SMT485C

GEAR COMPONENTS
n. Select proper mainshaft C-ring to minimize clearance of groove.
Refer to TM-55, "Available C-Rings". A
End play Refer to TM-55, "Available C-Rings"

B
SMT452A
TM
o. Install selected mainshaft C-ring, C-ring holder and new main-
shaft rear snap ring using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse mainshaft rear snap ring. E
G
SMT454A
p. Select proper counter gear rear snap ring to minimize clearance

of groove. Refer to TM-54, "Available Snap Rings". H
End play Refer to TM-54, "Available Snap Rings"

CAUTION: I
Do not reuse counter gear rear snap ring.
SMT453A
K
q. Install selected new counter gear rear snap ring using suitable
tool.
L
N
SMT455A
r. Install reverse coupling sleeve. O

CAUTION:
Pay attention to direction of reverse coupling sleeve.
P
SMT456A

GEAR COMPONENTS
s. Measure each gear end play as a final check. Refer to TM-54,
"Gear End Play".
SMT376A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FS5R30A]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

General Specification INFOID:0000000009480428
B
Engine QR25DE
C
Transmission model FS5R30A
Model code number EA000
Number of speed 5 TM
Synchromesh type Warner
Shift pattern
E
SCIA0821E
G
Gear ratio 1st 3.580
2nd 2.077
3rd 1.360 H
4th 1.000
OD 0.811
Reverse 3.636 I
Number of teeth Main gear Drive 22
1st 32
J
2nd 30
3rd 29
4th — K
OD 24
Reverse 30
L
Counter gear Drive 32
1st 13
2nd 21 M
3rd 31
4th —
N
OD 43
Reverse 12
Reverse idler gear 22 O
Oil capacity (Approx.) (US pt, Imp pt) 2.9 (6-1/8, 5-1/8)
Remarks Reverse synchronizer Installed
P
Double-cone synchronizer 2nd and 3rd

Gear End Play INFOID:0000000009480429
Unit: mm (in)
Gear End play

1st main gear 0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130)
2nd main gear 0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130)
3rd main gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
OD counter gear 0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130)
Reverse main gear 0.33 - 0.43 (0.0130 - 0.0169)
Baulk Ring Clearance INFOID:0000000009480430
Unit: mm (in)
Measurement point Standard value Limit value

2nd and 3rd Clearance between synchronizer cone 0.7 - 0.9 (0.028 - 0.035) 0.2 (0.008)
(Double-cone synchronizer) and inner baulk ring end face (A)
Clearance between outer baulk ring pawl 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 -0.043) 0.2 (0.008)
and synchronizer cone (B)
PCIB0249E
1st 1.05 - 1.3 (0.041 - 0.051) 0.7 (0.028)

Main drive 1.05 - 1.3 (0.041 - 0.051) 0.7 (0.028)
OD 1.05 - 1.3 (0.041 - 0.051) 0.7 (0.028)
Reverse Clearance between reverse cone and re- 0.35 - 0.95 (0.0138 - 0.0374) 1.1 (0.043)
verse baulk ring end face (A)
SMT428C
Available Snap Rings INFOID:0000000009480431
MAIN DRIVE GEAR SNAP RING
End play 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)

Thickness mm (in) Part number* Thickness mm (in) Part number*
1.89 (0.0744) 32204 01G60 2.03 (0.0799) 32204 01G63
1.95 (0.0768) 32204 01G61 2.07 (0.0815) 32204 01G64
1.99 (0.0783) 32204 01G62 2.11 (0.0831) 32204 01G65
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
MAINSHAFT FRONT SNAP RING
End play 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)

1.99 (0.0783) 32204 01G62 2.11 (0.0831) 32204 01G65
2.03 (0.0799) 32204 01G63 2.15 (0.0846) 32204 01G66
2.07 (0.0815) 32204 01G64 2.19 (0.0862) 32204 01G67

A
COUNTER GEAR REAR SNAP RING
End play 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)

B
1.32 (0.0520) 32236 01G00 1.56 (0.0614) 32236 01G04
1.38 (0.0543) 32236 01G01 1.62 (0.0638) 32236 01G05
1.44 (0.0567) 32236 01G02 1.68 (0.0661) 32236 01G06 C
1.50 (0.0591) 32236 01G03 1.74 (0.0685) 32236 01G07
TM
Available C-Rings INFOID:0000000009480432
MAINSHAFT C-RING E
End play 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)

Thickness mm (in) Part number* Thickness mm (in) Part number* F
2.63 (0.1035) 32348 01G15 3.19 (0.1256) 32348 01G07
2.70 (0.1063) 32348 01G00 3.26 (0.1283) 32348 01G08
2.77 (0.1091) 32348 01G01 3.33 (0.1311) 32348 01G09
2.84 (0.1118) 32348 01G02 3.40 (0.1339) 32348 01G10
G
2.91 (0.1146) 32348 01G03 3.47 (0.1366) 32348 01G11
2.98 (0.1173) 32348 01G04 3.54 (0.1394) 32348 01G12
3.05 (0.1201) 32348 01G05 3.61 (0.1421) 32348 01G13 H
3.12 (0.1228) 32348 01G06 3.68 (0.1449) 32348 01G14
Available Thrust Washer INFOID:0000000009480433

I
REVERSE IDLER THRUST WASHER

J
End play 0.30 - 0.53 mm (0.0118 - 0.0209 in)
Thickness mm (in) Part number*
K
A 1.97 (0.0776) 32284 01G20
B 2.07 (0.0815) 32284 01G21
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. L
Available Shims INFOID:0000000009480434
M
TABLE FOR SELECTING PROPER COUNTER GEAR FRONT BEARING SHIM
End play 0.10 - 0.26 mm (0.0039 - 0.0102 in)

N
Dial indicator deflection mm (in) Thickness of proper shim mm (in) Part number*
0.93 - 1.02 (0.0367 - 0.0401) 0.80 (0.0315) 32218 01G00
1.01 - 1.10 (0.0398 - 0.0433) 0.88 (0.0346) 32218 01G11 O
1.09 - 1.18 (0.0430 - 0.0464) 0.96 (0.0378) 32218 01G12
1.17 - 1.26 (0.0461 - 0.0496) 1.04 (0.0409) 32218 01G13
P
1.25 - 1.34 (0.0493 - 0.0527) 1.12 (0.0441) 32218 01G14
1.33 - 1.42 (0.0524 - 0.0559) 1.20 (0.0472) 32218 01G04
1.41 - 1.50 (0.0556 - 0.0590) 1.28 (0.0504) 32218 01G15
1.49 - 1.58 (0.0587 - 0.0622) 1.36 (0.0535) 32218 01G16
1.57 - 1.66 (0.0619 - 0.0653) 1.44 (0.0567) 32218 01G17

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
ual.
WARNING:
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
- Oily dirt:
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Do not reuse transmission oil once it has been drained.

• Check oil level or replace oil with vehicle on level surface.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
• During removal or installation, keep inside of transmission clear of dust or dirt.
• Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are required, be A
certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied to.
• In principle, tighten nuts and bolts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If
tightening sequence is specified, use it.
B
• Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.
TM

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
ST30911000 • Installing mainshaft bearing
( — ) • Installing 5th-6th synchronizer hub assem-
Inserter bly
• Installing reverse main gear bushing
• Installing 3rd gear bushing
• Installing 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assem-
bly
a: 98 mm (3.86 in) dia.
ZZA0920D b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
ST30022000 • Installing 3rd main gear
( — ) • Installing 4th main gear
Inserter a: 110 mm (4.33 in) dia.
b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
ZZA0920D
ST27861000 • Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assem-

( — ) bly
Support ring • Installing 1st gear bushing
a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
b: 52 mm (2.05 in) dia.
ZZA0832D
ST30032000 Installing counter rear bearing inner race

(J-26010-01) a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
Inserter b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
ZZA0920D
KV32102700 Installing main drive gear bearing

( — ) a: 48 mm (1.89 in) dia.
ZZA0534D
ST23860000 Installing reverse counter gear

( — ) a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
ZZA0534D

PREPARATION
(TechMate No.) A
Tool name
ST01530000 Installing reverse synchronizer hub assembly
( — ) a: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia. B
ZZA0534D
KV381054S0 Removing rear oil seal TM

(J-34286)
Puller
E
ZZA0601D F
ST33200000 • Installing counter rear bearing
(J-26082) • Installing rear oil seal
Drift a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. G
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
H
ZZA1002D
KV40100630 Installing 4th counter gear thrust washer

(J-26092) a: 67 mm (2.64 in) dia. I
Inserter b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
ZZA0920D
K
KV38102100 Installing front cover oil seal
(J-25803-01) a: 44 mm (1.73 in) dia.
L
M
NT084
KV32103300 Installing reverse synchronizer hub assembly

(J-46529) a: 73 mm (2.87 in)
N
Press plate
PCIB0165J
ST30031000 Measuring wear of inner baulk ring P

(J-22912-01)
Puller
ZZC0499D

PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
ST22490000 Holding a adapter plate
( — )
Adapter setting plate
ZZC0465D
ST33400001 Installing oil seal

(J-26082) a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
NT086
— Removing trim components

(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

Puller Removing each bearing, gear and bushing
ZZB0823D
Pin punch Removing and installing each retaining pin

Tip diameter: 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia.
ZZA0815D
Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts
PIIB1407E

PREPARATION
A
Puller • Removing reverse synchronizer hub as-
sembly
• Removing reverse counter gear
• Removing reverse main gear B
C
NT077
Drift Removing counter end bearing

a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
TM
LCIA0362E

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: FS6R31A]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000009480440
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspec-
tion. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
TM-108
TM-65
TM-77
TM-69
TM-69
Reference page
CHECK PLUG RETURN SPRING AND CHECK BALL (Worn or damaged)

SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)
SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn)
BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)

BEARING (Worn or damaged)
OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)
INSERT SPRING (Damaged)

GEAR (Worn or damaged)
OIL (Oil level is high.)
GASKET (Damaged)
SHIFT FORK (Worn)

OIL (Oil level is low.)
OIL (Wrong oil.)
Noise 1 2 3 3
Oil leakage 3 1 2 2
Symptoms
Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 2 2
Jumps out of gear 1 1 2 2

DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
A
Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000009480441
TM
PCIB1297E
N
1. Mainshaft 2. Reverse synchronizer hub 3. Reverse coupling sleeve
4. Reverse main gear 5. 4th main gear 6. 3rd main gear
7. 1st main gear 8. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve 9. 1st-2nd synchronizer hub O
10. 2nd main gear 11. 6th main gear 12. 5th-6th coupling sleeve
13. 5th-6th synchronizer hub 14. Main drive gear 15. Front cover
16. Transmission case 17. Counter gear 18. Filler plug P
19. 3rd counter gear 20. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub 21. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve
22. Drain plug 23. Adapter plate 24. 4th counter gear
25. Reverse idler gear 26. Reverse idler shaft 27. Reverse counter gear
28. OD gear case 29. Rear extension
DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER

DESCRIPTION
The 1st, 3rd and 4th gears are equipped with a double-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force of the
shift selector.
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
The 2nd gear is equipped with a triple-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force of the shift selector.
PCIB0594E

M/T OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: FS6R31A]
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
M/T OIL
Changing INFOID:0000000009480442
B
DRAINING
1. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transmission. C
2. Stop the engine. Remove the transmission drain plug and drain the oil.
3. Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it to the transmission. Tighten the drain plug to the specified
torque. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul". TM
CAUTION:
FILLING E
1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new oil until oil level reaches the
specified limit near the filler plug hole as shown.
F
Oil grade and viscosity : Refer to MA-16, "FOR
USA AND CANADA : Flu-
ids and Lubricants". G
Oil capacity : Refer to MA-16, "FOR
USA AND CANADA : Flu-
ids and Lubricants". H
2. After refilling the oil, check oil level. Set a gasket to the filler PCIB0268E
plug, then install it to the transmission. Tighten the filler plug to

the specified torque. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul". I
CAUTION:
J
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL

K
1. Make sure that oil is not leaking from the transmission or around it.
2. Check oil level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: L
Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Set a gasket on the filler plug and install it to the transmission.
Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77,
"Overhaul". M
CAUTION:
N
PCIB0268E

REAR OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

REAR OIL SEAL
REMOVAL
For 2WD Models
1. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-152, "Removal and
Installation" (3S1310), DLN-163, "Removal and Installation"
(3S1330), DLN-174, "Removal and Installation" (3S1330-
2BJ100).
2. Remove dust seal and rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage rear extension.
LCIA0383E
For 4WD Models

1. Remove front and rear propeller shafts. Refer to DLN-134, "Removal and Installation" (front) and DLN-
143, "Removal and Installation" (2S1330), DLN-174, "Removal and Installation" (3S1330-2BJ100) (rear).
2. Remove transfer assembly. Refer to DLN-101, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove rear oil seal using Tool.
Tool number : KV381054S0 (J-34286)

CAUTION:
Do not damage OD gear case.
PCIB1218E
INSTALLATION
For 2WD Models

REAR OIL SEAL
• Drive the new rear oil seal (1) and new dust seal (2) using Tools.
A
Tool number : ST33200000 (J-26082)
: KV38100500 ( — )
B
Dimension (H1) : 1.2 - 2.2 mm (0.047 - 0.087 in)
Dimension (H2) : 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in)
C
CAUTION:
• Do not incline the dust seal and rear oil seal during installa-
tion. TM
(A): Seal lip
G
PCIB1660E
For 4WD Models

• Drive the rear oil seal using Tool. H
Tool number : ST33200000 (J-26082)

I
Dimension (A) : -0.5 - 0.5 mm (-0.020 - 0.020 in
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse rear oil seal. J
• Do not incline the rear oil seal during installation.
PCIB1632E K
• Check the transmission oil level after installation. Refer to TM-65, "Checking".
L

POSITION SWITCH
POSITION SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH


Reverse Yes
Except reverse No
PCIB1633E
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH


Neutral Yes
Except neutral No

SHIFT CONTROL
SHIFT CONTROL
A
COMPONENTS B
TM
WCIA0508E
M
1. Retaining plate 2. Dust boot cover (upper) 3. Dust boot cover (lower)
4. Shift selector handle 5. Shift selector assembly 6. Clip A
7. Boot 8. Guide plate 9. Socket N
10. Bushing 11. Clip B 12. Spring
REMOVAL
O
1. Remove the shift selector handle.
2. Remove the M/T finisher. Refer to IP-29, "Exploded View".
3. Remove the retaining plate and dust boot covers. P
4. Remove the clip B and then separate the boot from the control housing.
5. Remove the guide plate bolts and then separate the guide plate.
6. Remove the shift selector assembly and spring from the transmission.
INSTALLATION
• Install shift selector handle according to the following.

SHIFT CONTROL
- Apply cement to threads of shift selector assembly.
- Tighten shift selector handle until increased tension is felt. Then
align shift selector handle to the position as shown within one turn.
CAUTION:
Do not adjust shift selector handle by loosening it.
PCIB1435E
CAUTION:
• Apply multi-purpose grease to socket and bushing.
• Insert bushing of shift selector assembly as far as it will go into the hole of striking arm.
• Tighten guide plate (1) bolts to the specified torque in order as
shown.
• : Front
PCIB1668E
• Do not reuse clip.

• Position clip as shown.
• Be careful with the orientation of guide plate and boot.
PCIB1434E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

• Tighten guide plate bolts to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
• When shift selector assembly is moved to each position, make sure there is no binding or disconnection in
either boot.
• When moved to each position, make sure there is no noise, bending, and backlash. Especially when shift
selector assembly is moved to 5th, 6th without pressing downward, check for bending.
• When shift selector assembly is moved to 1st, 2nd side and 5th, 6th side, confirm shift selector assembly
returns to neutral position smoothly.
• In any position other than reverse, confirm that shift selector assembly can be pressed downward.
• With shift selector assembly pressed downward, confirm that it can be moved to reverse.
• When moved from reverse to neutral position, confirm shift selector assembly returns to neutral position
smoothly with spring power.
• Without shift selector assembly pressed downward, confirm that it cannot be moved to reverse.

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
COMPONENTS B
TM
LCIA0392E
K
1. Water outlet 2. Bracket 3. Air breather hose
4. Breather tube
L
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect air breather hose from breather tube and transmission harness connector.
2. Disconnect air breather hose from the bracket. M
3. Remove the bracket bolt and remove the bracket from the transmission housing, if necessary.
4. Remove the breather tube bolt and the breather tube.
N
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
O
• Make sure there are no pinched or blocked areas on the air breather hose after installation.
• When inserting the air breather hose, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the end of the tube
radius.
• Install the air breather hose with the paint mark side up. P

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R31A]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD Models) INFOID:0000000009480448
COMPONENTS
AWDIA0687GB
1. Transmission assembly 2. Crossmember 3. Insulator
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Refer to PG-83, "Removal and Installation". A
3. Remove the LH fender protector. Refer to EXT-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Fender Protector".
B
4. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from M/T assem-
bly.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the sensor edge. C
5. Remove the under cover(s) using power tool.
6. Remove the front crossmember using power tool.
TM
7. Remove the starter motor. Refer to STR-36, "Removal and
Installation (VQ40DE)".
8. Remove the rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-143, "Removal
and Installation" (2S1330), DLN-163, "Removal and Installation" E
LCIA0367E
(3S1330), DLN-174, "Removal and Installation" (3S1330-
2BJ100).
9. Remove the left and right front exhaust tubes. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". F
lation".
11. Support the transmission using a suitable jack. G
13. Remove the crossmember using power tool.
H
WARNING:
14. Tilt the transmission slightly to gain clearance between the body and the transmission, then disconnect
the air breather hoses. Refer to TM-71, "Removal and Installation". I
15. Disconnect the following:
• Back-up lamp switch harness connector
• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector J
16. Remove the harness from the retainers.
17. Remove the transmission to engine bolts using power tool.
K
WARNING:
Support the transmission while removing it using suitable jack.
L
INSTALLATION
• When installing the transmission to the engine, tighten the bolts to M
the specified torque.
Quantity 10
N
Bolt length “ ”
65 (2.56)
mm (in)
Tightening torque O
75 (7.7, 55)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
CAUTION:
• When installing be careful to avoid interference between WCIA0507E
P
transmission main drive gear and clutch cover.
• If flywheel is removed, align dowel pin with the smallest hole of flywheel.
during re-assembly.
• Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drive
train components.

Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD Models) INFOID:0000000009480449
COMPONENTS
WCIA0577E
1. Transmission assembly 2. Crossmember 3. Insulator
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Refer to PG-83, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the LH fender protector. Refer to EXT-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Fender Protector".
4. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the M/T A
assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the sensor edge. B
7. Remove the starter motor. Refer to STR-36, "Removal and C
Installation (VQ40DE)".
8. Remove the front and rear propeller shafts. Refer to DLN-134,
"Removal and Installation" (front), DLN-143, "Removal and LCIA0367E
TM
Installation" (2S1330) or DLN-174, "Removal and Installation"
(3S1330-2BJ100) (rear).
9. Remove the left and right front exhaust tubes. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation". E
lation".
11. Support the transmission using a suitable jack. F
13. Remove the crossmember using power tool.
WARNING: G
the air breather hoses. Refer to TM-71, "Removal and Installation". H
15. Disconnect the following:
• Back-up lamp switch harness connector
• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector I
• ATP switch harness connector
• Neutral 4LO switch harness connector
• Wait detection switch harness connector
• Transfer control device harness connector J
17. Remove the transmission to engine bolts using power tool.
K
WARNING:
Support manual transmission while removing it.
L
INSTALLATION
• When installing the transmission to the engine, tighten the bolts to M
the specified torque.
Quantity 10
N
Bolt length “ ”
65 (2.56)
mm (in)
Tightening torque
75 (7.7, 55) O
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
CAUTION:
• When installing be careful to avoid interference between WCIA0507E
P
transmission main drive gear and clutch cover.
• If flywheel is removed, align dowel pin with the smallest hole of flywheel. Refer to EM-220, "Disas-
sembly and Assembly".
during re-assembly.

• Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration oil leaks or breakage of driv-
etrain components.

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: FS6R31A]

Overhaul INFOID:0000000009480450
B
EXPLODED VIEW
Case Components C
TM
O
PCIB1208E
1. Front cover gasket 2. Front cover 3. Washer

4. Withdrawal lever ball pin 5. Front cover oil seal 6. Pivot bolt P
7. Check shift pin 8. Filler plug 9. Gasket
10. Transmission case 11. Drain plug 12. Sliding ball bearing
13. Bushing 14. Oil gutter 15. Breather
16. Dowel pin 17. Magnet 18. Baffle plate
19. Adapter plate 20. Baffle plate 21. Bearing retainer

PCIB1209E
1. Control housing 2. Gasket 3. Plunger

4. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 5. Clip 6. Back-up lamp switch
7. Sliding ball bearing 8. Bushing 9. Rear extension oil gutter
10. Cap 11. Counter end bearing 12. Rear extension
13. Rear oil seal 14. Dust seal 15. Dowel pin
16. OD gear case
Gear Components

TM
PCIB1210E
K
1. Snap ring 2. Main drive gear bearing 3. Main drive gear

4. Main pilot bearing 5. Pilot bearing spacer 6. 5th baulk ring L
7. 5th-6th spread spring 8. 5th-6th shifting insert 9. 5th-6th synchronizer hub
10. 5th-6th coupling sleeve 11. 6th baulk ring 12. 6th needle bearing
13. 6th main gear 14. Mainshaft 15. 2nd needle bearing M
16. 2nd main gear 17. 2nd inner baulk ring 18. 2nd synchronizer cone
19. 2nd outer baulk ring 20. 1st-2nd spread spring 21. 1st-2nd shifting insert
22. 1st-2nd synchronizer hub 23. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve 24. 1st outer baulk ring N
25. 1st synchronizer cone 26. 1st inner baulk ring 27. 1st gear bushing
28. 1st needle bearing 29. 1st main gear 30. 3rd main gear
31. 3rd-4th main spacer 32. 4th main gear 33. Mainshaft bearing O
34. Reverse main gear bushing 35. Reverse main needle bearing 36. Reverse main gear
37. Reverse baulk ring 38. Reverse spread spring 39. Reverse shifting insert
40. Reverse synchronizer hub 41. Reverse coupling sleeve P

PCIB1211E
1. Counter front bearing 2. Counter gear 3. 3rd gear bushing

4. 3rd needle bearing 5. 3rd counter gear 6. 3rd inner baulk ring
7. 3rd synchronizer cone 8. 3rd outer baulk ring 9. 3rd-4th spread spring
10. 3rd-4th shifting insert 11. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub 12. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve
13. 4th outer baulk ring 14. 4th synchronizer cone 15. 4th inner baulk ring
16. 4th gear bushing 17. 4th needle bearing 18. 4th counter gear
19. 4th counter gear thrust washer 20. Counter rear bearing inner race 21. Counter rear bearing
22. Counter rear bearing spacer 23. Reverse counter gear 24. Snap ring
25. Counter end bearing 26. Reverse idler shaft 27. Reverse idler needle bearing
28. Reverse idler gear 29. Reverse idler thrust washer
Shift Control Components

TM
I
PCIB1212E
1. Check ball plug 2. Check ball spring 3. Check ball

J
4. Interlock pin 5. Interlock plunger 6. Retaining pin
7. 3rd-4th fork rod bracket 8. 3rd-4th fork rod 9. 1st-2nd fork rod
10. 1st-2nd shift fork 11. 3rd-4th fork rod (reversal side) 12. 3rd-4th shift fork
K
13. 5th-6th shift fork 14. 5th-6th fork rod (reversal side) 15. 5th-6th fork rod
16. 5th-6th fork rod bracket 17. 3rd-4th control lever 18. Shifter cap
19. 5th-6th control lever 20. Adapter plate
L

PCIB1213E
1. Return spring plunger 2. Return spring 3. Return spring plug

4. Striking arm 5. Retaining pin 6. Stopper ring
7. Striking rod assembly 8. Adapter plate 9. Reverse fork rod
10. Reverse shift fork 11. Rear extension 12. OD gear case

CASE COMPONENTS
CASE COMPONENTS
A
Case Components B
1. Remove clips from PNP switch and back-up lamp switch.
2. Remove PNP switch, back-up lamp switch and plungers from
rear extension (or OD gear case). C
TM
E
PCIB1215E
3. Remove control housing bolts, and then remove control housing F

and gasket from rear extension (or OD gear case).
PCIB1216E I
4. Remove return spring plug, return spring and return spring

plunger from rear extension (or OD gear case). J
CAUTION:
Do not reuse return spring plug.
PCIB1643E
M
5. Remove rear oil seal from OD gear case using Tool (for 4WD
models).
Tool number : KV381054S0 (J-34286) N
CAUTION:
Do not damage OD gear case.
O
P
PCIB1218E

CASE COMPONENTS
6. Remove retaining pin using suitable tool, and then remove strik-
ing arm from striking rod assembly.
PCIB1219E
7. Remove rear extension (or OD gear case) bolts, and then

remove rear extension (or OD gear case) from adapter plate
PCIB1220E
8. Remove rear extension oil gutter bolt, and then remove rear
extension oil gutter and cap from rear extension. (For 2WD mod-
els)
PCIB1221E
9. Remove dust seal and rear oil seal from rear extension using
suitable tool. (For 2WD models)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage rear extension.
PCIB1222E
10. Remove counter end bearing from rear extension (or OD gear
case) using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage rear extension (or OD gear case).
PCIB1223E

CASE COMPONENTS
11. Remove withdrawal lever ball pin and washer from front cover.
A
PCIB1224E
TM
12. Remove front cover bolts, and then remove front cover and
front cover gasket from transmission case.
E
G
PCIB1225E
13. Remove front cover oil seal from front cover using suitable tool. H
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage front cover.
I
SCIA1399E K
14. Remove baffle plate nut from transmission case.

L
SCIA1443E
15. Remove snap ring from main drive gear bearing using suitable O
tool.
SCIA1532E

CASE COMPONENTS
16. Remove pivot bolt and check shift pin from transmission case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse pivot bolt and check shift pin.
PCIB1226E
17. Remove transmission case from adapter plate.
PCIB1227E
18. Remove counter front bearing from transmission case.
PCIB0436E
19. Remove oil gutter from transmission case.
PCIB1228E
20. Remove filler plug and gasket from transmission case.

CAUTION:
PCIB1229E

CASE COMPONENTS
A
CASE COMPONENTS
1. Install main drive gear assembly, mainshaft assembly, counter gear assembly and reverse idler shaft B
assembly. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
2. Install fork rods and shift forks. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
3. Install oil gutter to transmission case. C
TM
PCIB1228E F
4. Install counter front bearing to transmission case.

CAUTION:
Apply multi-purpose grease to counter front bearing. G
PCIB0436E
J
5. Apply recommended sealant to mating surface of transmission
case as shown.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or the equivalent. Refer to GI-
21, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". K
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to L
both mating surfaces.
M
PCIB1270E
6. Install transmission case to adapter plate assembly.

N
PCIB1227E

CASE COMPONENTS
7. Install snap ring to main drive gear bearing using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.
SCIA1532E
8. Tighten baffle plate nut to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77,

"Overhaul".
SCIA1443E
9. Tighten baffle plate bolt to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77,

"Overhaul".
PCIB1271E
10. Install front cover oil seal to front cover using Tool.
Tool number : KV38102100 (J-25803-01)
Dimension (A) : 8.55 - 9.55 mm (0.336 - 0.376 in)

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse front cover oil seal.
• Apply multi-purpose grease onto oil seal lip.
• When installing, do not incline front cover oil seal.
PCIB1272E

CASE COMPONENTS
11. Install front cover according to the following.
a. Install front cover gasket and front cover to transmission case. A
CAUTION:
Do not reuse front cover gasket.
b. Temporarily tighten 2 bolts in the positions shown. B
c. Temporarily tighten remaining 9 bolts.
PCIB1273E
TM
d. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in order as shown. Refer to

TM-77, "Overhaul". E
CAUTION:
Do not reuse bolts indicated as (A) in the figure.
F
PCIB1274E
H
12. Install washer to withdrawal lever ball pin, and then install it to
front cover. Tighten withdrawal lever ball pin to the specified
torque. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
I
K
PCIB1224E

CASE COMPONENTS
13. Install counter end bearing to rear extension (or OD gear case)
using suitable tool [32 mm (1.26 in) dia.].
Dimension (A) : 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in)

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse counter end bearing.
• Apply gear oil to counter end bearing.
• Install counter end bearing with maker stamp at upper
side.
PCIB1275E
14. Install rear extension oil gutter according to the following. (For 2WD models)
a. Install cap to rear extension oil gutter.
b. Install rear extension oil gutter to rear extension, and then
tighten bolt to specified torque. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
PCIB1221E
15. Install rear oil seal (1) to rear extension (or OD gear case) using
Tool (A).
Tool number : ST33200000 (J-26082)
Dimension (H1)
2WD models : 1.2 - 2.2 mm (0.047 - 0.087 in)
4WD models : -0.5 - 0.5 mm (-0.020 - 0.020 in)
CAUTION:
• When installing, do not incline rear oil seal.
(B): Seal lip
SCIA7341E

CASE COMPONENTS
16. Install dust seal (1) to rear extension using Tool (A) (for 2WD
models). A
Tool number : KV38100500 ( — )

B
Dimension (H2) : 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in)
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse dust seal. C
• When installing, do not incline dust seal.
(B): Seal lip
TM
G
SCIA7342E
17. Apply recommended sealant to mating surface of rear extension

H
as shown.
CAUTION: I
Remove old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
both mating surfaces. J
PCIB1278E
K
18. Install rear extension (or OD gear case) to adapter plate, and
then tighten bolts to the specified torque in order as shown.
Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul". L
N
PCIB1279E
19. Install check shift pin and pivot bolt to transmission case, and O
then tighten them to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77, "Over-
haul".
CAUTION: P
Do not reuse check shift pin and pivot bolt.
PCIB1226E

CASE COMPONENTS
20. Install return spring plunger, return spring and return spring plug
to rear extension (or OD gear case), and then tighten return
spring plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse return spring plug.
• Apply gear oil to return spring plunger.
PCIB1643E
21. Install PNP switch and back-up lamp switch according to the following.
a. Install plunger to rear extension (or OD gear case).
b. Apply recommended sealant to threads of PNP switch and
back-up lamp switch.
c. Install PNP switch and back-up lamp switch to rear extension (or
OD gear case), and tighten them to the specified torque. Refer
to TM-77, "Overhaul".
PCIB1215E
22. Install clips to PNP switch and back-up lamp switch.

CAUTION:
• Thread harness through the notch of clip.
PCIB1638E
• Thread the harness as shown.
PCIB1639E
23. Install striking arm according to the following.

CASE COMPONENTS
a. Install striking arm to striking rod assembly.
b. Install retaining pin to striking arm using suitable tool. A
CAUTION:
B
PCIB1219E
TM
24. Install control housing according to the following.
a. Install gasket and control housing to rear extension (or OD gear
case). E
CAUTION:
b. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in order as shown. Refer to
F
TM-77, "Overhaul".
PCIB1216E
H
25. Install gasket to drain plug, and then install it to transmission
case. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77,
"Overhaul".
CAUTION: I
K
PCIB1214E
26. Install gasket to filler plug, and then install it to transmission

case. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77, L
"Overhaul".
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse gasket. M
• After oil is filled, tighten filler plug to specified torque.
PCIB1229E
O


1. Remove rear extension (or OD gear case) and transmission case. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
2. Install Tool to adapter plate, and then position in a vise.

CAUTION:
Do not directly secure mating surface of adapter plate in a
vise.
PCIB1230E
3. Remove baffle plate bolts, and then remove baffle plate from
adapter plate.
PCIB1325E
4. Remove check ball plugs, check ball springs and check balls
from adapter plate.
PCIB1231E
5. Remove 3rd-4th control lever bolts, and then remove 3rd-4th

control lever and shifter cap from adapter plate.
PCIB1232E

6. Remove retaining pin using suitable tool, and then remove 3rd -
4th fork rod bracket and 3rd-4th fork rod from adapter plate. A
PCIB0145E
TM
7. Remove check balls and interlock pin from adapter plate.
G
PCIB0146E
8. Remove retaining pin using a suitable tool, and then remove

H
3rd-4th shift fork and 3rd-4th fork rod (reversal side) from
adapter plate.
PCIB0601E
K
9. Remove retaining pin using a suitable tool, and then remove 1st-
2nd shift fork and 1st-2nd fork rod from adapter plate.
L
N
PCIB0602E
10. Remove interlock plunger and interlock pin from adapter plate. O
PCIB0147E

11. Remove retaining pin using suitable tool, and then remove
reverse shift fork and reverse fork rod from adapter plate.
SCIA1447E
12. Remove check balls from adapter plate.
PCIB0148E
13. Remove retaining pin using suitable tool, and then remove 5th-
6th fork rod bracket and 5th-6th fork rod from adapter plate.
PCIB0239E
14. Remove 5th-6th control lever bolts, and then remove 5th-6th
control lever from adapter plate.
PCIB1233E
15. Remove retaining pin using suitable tool, and then remove 5th-
6th shift fork and 5th-6th fork rod (reversal side) from adapter
plate.
PCIB0412E

16. Remove retaining pin using suitable tool, and then remove stop-
per ring from striking rod assembly. A
PCIB1234E
TM
17. Remove striking rod assembly from adapter plate.
G
PCIB1235E
H

If the contact surface on striking lever, fork rod, shift fork, etc., has I
excessive wear, abrasion, bend, or any other damage, replace the
components.
J
PCIB1245E
Assembly INFOID:0000000009480455 P

1. Install main drive gear assembly, mainshaft assembly, counter gear assembly and reverse idler shaft
assembly. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
2. Install striking rod assembly according to the following.

a. Install striking rod assembly to adapter plate.
PCIB1235E
b. Install stopper ring to striking rod assembly.

c. Install retaining pin onto stopper ring using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
PCIB1234E
3. Install 5th-6th fork rod (reversal side) according to the following.

a. Install 5th-6th shift fork to 5th-6th coupling sleeve.
b. Install 5th-6th fork rod (reversal side) to 5th-6th shift fork.
c. Install retaining pin onto 5th-6th shift fork using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
PCIB0412E
4. Install 5th-6th control lever to adapter plate, and then tighten

bolts to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
CAUTION:
Install 5th-6th control lever with projection side upward.
PCIB1233E
5. Install 5th-6th fork rod according to the following.

a. Install 5th-6th fork bracket and 5th-6th fork rod to adapter plate.
b. Install retaining pin onto 5th-6th fork bracket using suitable tool. A
CAUTION:
B
PCIB0239E
TM
6. Install check balls to adapter plate.
CAUTION:
Apply gear oil to check balls.
E
G
PCIB0148E
7. Install reverse fork rod according to the following.

H
a. Install reverse shift fork to reverse coupling sleeve.
b. Install reverse fork rod to reverse shift fork.
c. Install retaining pin onto reverse shift fork using suitable tool. I
CAUTION:
J
K
SCIA1447E
8. Install interlock pin and interlock plunger to adapter plate.

CAUTION: L
Apply gear oil to interlock pin and interlock plunger.
PCIB0147E
O
9. Install 1st-2nd fork rod according to the following.

a. Install 1st-2nd shift fork to 1st-2nd coupling sleeve.
b. Install 1st-2nd fork rod to 1st-2nd shift fork.
c. Install retaining pin onto 1st-2nd shift fork using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
PCIB0602E
10. Install interlock pin and check balls to adapter plate.

CAUTION:
Apply gear oil to interlock pin and check balls.
PCIB0146E
11. Install 3rd-4th fork rod (reversal side) according to the following.
a. Install 3rd-4th shift fork to 3rd-4th coupling sleeve.
b. Install 3rd-4th fork rod (reversal side) to 3rd-4th shift fork.
c. Install retaining pin onto 3rd-4th shift fork using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
PCIB0601E
12. Install 3rd-4th fork rod according to the following.

a. Install 3rd-4th fork rod to adapter plate.
b. Install 3rd-4th fork rod bracket to 3rd-4th fork rod.
c. Install retaining pin onto 3rd-4th fork rod bracket using suitable
tool.
CAUTION:
PCIB0145E
13. Install 3rd-4th control lever according to the following.

a. Install shifter cap to 3rd-4th control lever.
b. Install 3rd-4th control lever to adapter plate, and then tighten A
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul" "Shift
Control Components".
CAUTION: B
Be careful with the orientation 3rd-4th control lever.
PCIB1232E
TM
14. Install check ball plug according to the following.
a. Install check balls, check ball springs to adapter plate.
CAUTION: E
Apply gear oil to check ball.
b. Apply recommended sealant to threads of check ball plugs, and
tighten check ball plugs to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77,
F
"Overhaul".
G
PCIB1231E
H
15. Install baffle plate to adapter plate, and then tighten bolt to the
specified torque. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
I
K
PCIB1325E

GEAR COMPONENTS
GEAR COMPONENTS
GEAR COMPONENTS
1. Remove rear extension (or OD gear case) and transmission case. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
2. Remove shift forks and fork rods. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
3. Before disassembling, measure the end play for each position. If the end play is outside the standards,
disassemble and inspect.
• Main drive gear
End play Refer to TM-126, "Gear End Play"
PCIB0484E
• Mainshaft (Rear side)

End Play"
PCIB0225E
• Counter gear

End Play"
PCIB0226E
4. Remove reverse idler gear according to the following.

a. Remove reverse idler shaft assembly from adapter plate.
b. Remove reverse idler thrust washer, reverse idler gear and
reverse idler needle bearing from reverse idler shaft.
PCIB1326E

GEAR COMPONENTS
5. Remove reverse main gear and reverse synchronizer hub assembly according to the following.
a. Remove snap ring from mainshaft using suitable tool. A
PCIB1236E
TM
b. Remove reverse main gear and reverse synchronizer hub

assembly using suitable tool. E
c. Remove reverse main needle bearing from mainshaft.
SCIA1683E
H
6. Remove reverse coupling sleeve according to the following.
a. Remove snap ring from reverse synchronizer hub.
b. Remove spread springs and shifting inserts from reverse syn- I
chronizer hub.
c. Remove reverse coupling sleeve from reverse synchronizer
hub. J
PCIB1237E
L
7. Remove reverse counter gear according to the following.
a. Remove snap ring from counter gear using suitable tool.
M
PCIB1239E

GEAR COMPONENTS
b. Remove reverse counter gear using suitable tool.
8. Remove counter rear bearing spacer from counter gear.
SCIA1682E
9. Remove bearing retainer bolts, and then remove bearing

retainer.
PCIB1238E
10. Remove main drive gear assembly, mainshaft assembly and counter gear assembly according to the fol-
lowing.
a. Remove snap ring from mainshaft bearing using suitable tool.
SCIA1691E
b. Carefully tap mainshaft using suitable tool, and then remove

main drive gear assembly, mainshaft assembly and counter
gear assembly from adapter plate.
c. Remove main pilot bearing, pilot bearing spacer from mainshaft.
d. Remove 5th baulk ring from main drive gear.
SCIA1456E

GEAR COMPONENTS
11. Remove counter rear bearing from adapter plate.
A
PCIB0244E
TM
12. Remove magnet from adapter plate.
G
PCIB1240E
13. Remove baffle plate bolt, and then remove baffle plate from
H
adapter plate.
PCIB1241E
K
14. Remove breather from adapter plate.
N
PCIB1242E
15. Remove main drive gear bearing according to the following. O

GEAR COMPONENTS
a. Remove snap ring from main drive gear using suitable tool.
SCIA1461E
b. Press out main drive gear bearing using suitable tool.
SCIA1533E
16. Before disassembling, measure the end play for mainshaft

(Front side). If the end play is outside the standards, disassem-
ble and inspect.

End Play"
PCIB1243E
17. Press out reverse main gear bushing, mainshaft bearing and 4th
main gear using suitable tool.
18. Remove 3rd-4th main spacer from mainshaft.
SCIA1386E
19. Remove 3rd main gear and 1st main gear according to the following.

GEAR COMPONENTS
a. Press out 3rd main gear and 1st main gear using suitable tool.
CAUTION: A
Be careful not to damage 1st outer baulk ring.
b. Remove 1st needle bearing from mainshaft.
B
SCIA1458E
TM
20. Remove 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly and 2nd main gear according to the following.
a. Press out 1st gear bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly
and 2nd main gear using suitable tool. E
CAUTION:
Be aware that when using the press, if mainshaft gear posi-
tioner catches on the V-block, etc., mainshaft could be dam-
aged. F
b. Remove 2nd needle bearing from mainshaft.
21. Remove 1st-2nd coupling sleeve according to the following.
G
a. Remove spread springs and shifting inserts from 1st-2nd syn-
chronizer hub.
SCIA1459E
b. Remove 1st-2nd coupling sleeve from 1st-2nd synchronizer
H
hub.
22. Remove 6th main gear and 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly according to the following.
a. Remove snap ring from mainshaft using suitable tool. I
PCIB1244E
L
b. Press out 6th main gear and 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly
using suitable tool. M
c. Remove 6th needle bearing from mainshaft.
23. Remove 5th-6th coupling sleeve according to the following.
a. Remove spread springs and shifting inserts from 5th-6th syn- N
chronizer hub.
b. Remove 5th-6th coupling sleeve from 5th-6th synchronizer hub.
O
SCIA1460E
P
24. Remove 3rd counter gear, 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly, 4th counter gear according to the follow-
ing.

GEAR COMPONENTS
a. Press out 3rd counter gear, 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly,
4th counter gear, 4th needle bearing, 4th gear bushing, 4th
counter gear thrust washer, and counter rear bearing inner race
b. Remove 3rd needle bearing from counter gear.
25. Remove 3rd-4th coupling sleeve according to the following.
a. Remove spread springs and shifting inserts from 3rd-4th syn-
chronizer hub.
b. Remove 3rd-4th coupling sleeve from 3rd-4th synchronizer hub.
SCIA1389E
26. Press out 3rd gear bushing using suitable tool.

CAUTION:
Do not use oil hole of 3rd gear bushing when press out.
PCIB1327E
GEAR AND SHAFT

If the contact surface on each gear, mainshaft, main drive gear, and
counter gear, etc., has damage, peeling, abrasion, dent, bent, or any
other damage, replace the components.
SCIA1680E
PCIB1246E
SYNCHRONIZERS

GEAR COMPONENTS
• If the contact surface on coupling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and
shifting insert has damage or abrasion, replace the components. A
• Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub shall move smoothly.
SMT387A
TM
• If the cam surface on baulk ring or contact surface on insert has
damage or excessive wear, replace with a new one.
• If spread spring damaged, replace with a new one. E
G
SCIA0608J
• Reverse Synchronizer H
Push baulk ring on the cone, and measure the clearance between
baulk ring and cone. If the measurement is below limit, replace it
with a new one. I
Clearance
Standard Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring J
value Clearance"
Limit value Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring
Clearance" K
PCIB1328E
BAULK RING CLEARANCE L

• Single Cone Synchronizer (5th and 6th)
Push baulk ring on the cone, and measure the clearance between
baulk ring and cone. If the measurement is below limit, replace it
with a new one. M
Clearance
Standard value Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring N
Clearance"
Clearance" O
PCIB1328E
P
• Double Cone Synchronizer (1st, 3rd and 4th)

GEAR COMPONENTS
Check the clearance between outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone,
and inner baulk ring as follows.
CAUTION:
The clearances (A) and (B) are controlled with outer baulk
ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring as a set.
Replace them as a set if the clearances are outside the limit
value.
SCIA1679E
1. Measure the clearance (A) at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-

site using a dial indicator and Tool. Then calculate the mean
value.
Tool number : ST30031000 (J-22912-01)
Clearance (A)
Standard value Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring
Clearance"
Limit value Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring PCIB0945E
Clearance"
2. Measure the clearance (B) at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-

site using a feeler gauge. Then calculate the mean value.
Clearance (B)
Standard value
1st Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance"
3rd,4th Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance"
Limit value Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring Clear- SCIA1084E
ance"
• Triple Cone Synchronizer (2nd)

Check the clearance between outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone,
and inner baulk ring as follows.
CAUTION:
The clearances (A), (B) and (C) are controlled with outer baulk
ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring as a set.
Replace them as a set if the clearances are outside the limit
value.
PCIB0603E

GEAR COMPONENTS
1. Measure the clearance (A) at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-
site using a feeler gauge when pressing baulk ring toward clutch A
gear taper cone. Then calculate the mean value.
Clearance (A) B
Clearance"
Limit value Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring C
Clearance"
PCIB0887E
TM
2. Measure the clearance (B) at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-
site using a feeler gauge. Then calculate the mean value.
E
Clearance (B)
Standard value Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance" F
Limit value Refer to TM-126, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance"
G
PCIB1329E
3. Measure the clearance (C) at 2 points or more diagonally oppo- H

site using a feeler gauge when pressing baulk ring toward clutch
gear taper cone. Then calculate the mean value.
I
Clearance (C)
Clearance"
J
Clearance"
PCIB0888E K
BEARINGS
If the bearing does not rotate smoothly or the contact surface on ball L
or race is damaged or peeled, replace with new ones.
SMT418A O
GEAR COMPONENTS P
1. Install 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly according to the following.
a. Install 5th-6th coupling sleeve to 5th-6th synchronizer hub.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse 5th-6th synchronizer hub and 5th-6th coupling sleeve.
• Replace 5th-6th synchronizer hub and 5th-6th coupling sleeve as a set.

GEAR COMPONENTS
• Be careful with the orientation 5th-6th coupling sleeve.
PCIB1247E
• Be careful with the orientation 5th-6th synchronizer hub.
PCIB1248E
b. Install shifting inserts and spread springs to 5th-6th synchronizer

hub.
CAUTION:
• Do not install spread spring hook onto the same shifting
insert.
SCIA1600E
• Be careful with the shape of reserve shifting insert to

avoid misemploy.
PCIB0608E

GEAR COMPONENTS
c. Press in 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly, 6th baulk ring, 6th
main gear and 6th needle bearing using Tool. A

CAUTION: B
• Apply gear oil to 6th baulk ring and 6th needle bearing.
• Be careful with the orientation 5th-6th coupling sleeve.
C
PCIB1249E
TM
NOTE:
5th and 6th baulk rings have three spaces that four gear teeth
are missing as shown. E
PCIB1330E
H
2. Select and install a snap ring so that the end play comes within
the standard value. Refer to TM-126, "Snap Rings".
I
End play : 0 - 0.10 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring. J
K
PCIB0609E
3. Install 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly according to the following. L

a. Install 1st-2nd coupling sleeve to 1st-2nd synchronizer hub.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse 1st-2nd coupling sleeve and 1st-2nd synchronizer hub.
• Replace 1st-2nd synchronizer hub and 1st-2nd coupling sleeve as a set. M
• Be careful with the orientation 1st-2nd coupling sleeve.
P
PCIB1250E

GEAR COMPONENTS
• Be careful with the orientation 1st-2nd synchronizer hub.
PCIB1251E
b. Install spread springs and shifting inserts to 1st-2nd synchro-

nizer hub.
CAUTION:
insert.
SCIA1600E
• Be careful with the shape of reverse shifting insert to

avoid misassembly.
PCIB0608E
c. Press in 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly, 2nd inner baulk

ring, 2nd synchronizer cone and 2nd outer baulk ring, 2nd main
gear and 2nd needle bearing using Tool.

CAUTION:
• Apply gear oil to 2nd needle bearing, 2nd inner baulk ring,
2nd synchronizer cone and 2nd outer baulk ring, 1st-2nd
synchronizer hub spline of mainshaft.
• Replace 2nd inner baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone and
2nd outer baulk ring as a set. PCIB1253E
• Be careful with the orientation 1st-2nd coupling sleeve.
NOTE:

GEAR COMPONENTS
1st outer baulk ring has three spaces that three gear tooth is
missing and 2nd outer baulk ring has three spaces that two gear A
teeth are missing.
PCIB1252E
TM
4. Press in 1st gear bushing using Tool.
Tool number : ST27861000 ( — ) E

5. Install 1st outer baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, 1st inner
baulk ring, 1st needle bearing and 1st main gear to mainshaft.
CAUTION: F
• Apply gear oil to 1st outer baulk ring, 1st synchronizer
cone, 1st inner baulk ring and 1st needle bearing.
• Replace 1st outer baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone and
G
1st inner baulk ring as a set.
PCIB1254E
NOTE: H
1st outer baulk ring has three spaces that three gear tooth is
missing and 2nd outer baulk ring has three spaces that two gear
teeth are missing.
I
K
PCIB1252E
6. Press in 3rd main gear using Tool. L

CAUTION: M
• Do not reuse 3rd main gear.
• Be careful with the orientation 3rd main gear.
N
PCIB1255E
O

GEAR COMPONENTS
7. Install 3rd-4th main spacer to mainshaft.
8. Press in 4th main gear using Tool.

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse 4th main gear.
• Be careful with the orientation 4th main gear.
PCIB1256E
9. Press in mainshaft bearing using Tool.

CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation mainshaft bearing.
PCIB1257E
10. Press in reverse main gear bushing using Tool.
PCIB1258E
11. Press in 3rd gear bushing using Tool.

12. Install 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly according to the fol-
lowing.
a. Install 3rd-4th coupling sleeve to 3rd-4th synchronizer hub.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd-4th cou-
pling sleeve.
• Replace 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd-4th coupling PCIB1260E
sleeve as a set.

GEAR COMPONENTS
• Be careful with the orientation 3rd-4th coupling sleeve.
A
PCIB1259E
TM
b. Install spread springs and shifting inserts to 3rd-4th synchronizer
hub.
CAUTION:
E
insert.
G
SCIA1600E
• Be careful with the shape of reverse shifting insert to H

avoid misassembly.
PCIB0608E K
c. Press in 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly, 3rd inner baulk

ring, 3rd synchronizer cone, 3rd outer baulk ring, 3rd counter L
gear and 3rd needle bearing using Tool.

M
CAUTION:
• Apply gear oil to 3rd inner baulk ring, 3rd synchronizer
cone, 3rd outer baulk ring and 3rd needle bearing, hole
spline of 3rd-4th synchronizer hub. N
• Replace 3rd inner baulk ring, 3rd synchronizer cone and
3rd outer baulk ring as a set. PCIB1262E
• Be careful with the orientation 3rd-4th coupling sleeve. O

NOTE:

GEAR COMPONENTS
4th baulk ring has three spaces that one gear tooth is missing
but 3rd baulk ring doesn't.
PCIB1261E
13. Press in 4th counter gear thrust washer, 4th gear bushing, 4th
needle bearing, 4th counter gear, 4th outer baulk ring,4th syn-
chronizer cone and 4th inner baulk ring using Tool.
Tool number : KV40100630 (J-26092)

CAUTION:
• Apply gear oil to 4th needle bearing, 4th outer baulk ring,
4th synchronizer cone and 4th inner baulk ring.
• Replace 4th outer baulk ring, 4th synchronizer cone and
4th inner baulk ring as a set.
• Be careful with the orientation 4th counter gear thrust PCIB1263E
washer.
NOTE:
4th baulk ring has three spaces that one gear tooth is missing
but 3rd baulk ring doesn't.
PCIB1261E
14. Press in counter rear bearing inner race using Tool.
Tool number : ST30032000 (J-26010-01)

CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation counter rear bearing inner
race.
PCIB1264E
15. Install main drive gear bearing according to the following.

GEAR COMPONENTS
a. Press in main drive gear bearing using Tool.
A
Tool number : KV32102700 ( — )
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation main drive gear bearing. B
PCIB1265E
TM
b. Select and install a snap ring to main drive gear bearing so that
the end play comes within the standard value. Refer to TM-126,
"Snap Rings".
E
End play : 0 - 0.10 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
CAUTION: F
G
PCIB0484E
16. Install breather to adapter plate.

H
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse breather.
• Be careful with the orientation breather.
I
PCIB1242E
K
17. Install magnet to adapter plate.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation magnet. L
N
PCIB1240E
18. Install baffle plate to adapter plate, and then tighten bolt to the O
specified torque. Refer to TM-77, "Overhaul".
PCIB1241E

GEAR COMPONENTS
19. Install main drive gear assembly, mainshaft assembly and counter gear assembly according to the follow-
ing.
a. Install main pilot bearing, pilot bearing spacer and 5th baulk ring
to main drive gear.
b. Install main drive gear assembly, mainshaft assembly and
counter gear assembly combined in one unit to adapter plate
using brass bar.
PCIB0151E
20. Install Tool to adapter plate, and then position in a vise.

CAUTION:
Do not directly secure mating surface of adapter plate in a
vise.
PCIB1266E
21. Install snap ring to mainshaft bearing.

CAUTION:
SCIA1691E
22. Install counter rear bearing to adapter plate using Tool.
Tool number : ST33200000 (J-26082)

23. Install counter rear bearing spacer to counter gear.
CAUTION:
When installing counter rear bearing spacer, groove should
face to the rear side.
PCIB1375E
24. Install bearing retainer according to the following.

GEAR COMPONENTS
a. Install bearing retainer to adapter plate.
b. Apply recommended thread locking sealant to threads of bolts, A
and then tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to TM-77,
"Overhaul".
• Use Genuine Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant or B
the equivalent. Refer to GI-21, "Recommended Chemical
Products and Sealants".
C
PCIB1238E
TM
25. Install reverse synchronizer hub assembly according to the following.
a. Install reverse coupling sleeve to reverse synchronizer hub.
CAUTION: E
• Do not reuse reverse coupling sleeve and reverse synchronizer hub.
• Replace reuse reverse coupling sleeve and reverse synchronizer hub as a set.
• Be careful with the orientation reverse coupling sleeve.
F
PCIB0617E
I
• Be careful with the orientation reverse synchronizer hub.

J
PCIB1267E
b. Install spread springs to shifting inserts to reverse synchronizer M

hub.
CAUTION:
• Do not install spread spring hook onto the same shifting N
insert.
SCIA1600E
P

GEAR COMPONENTS
• Be careful with the shape of 1st-2nd, 3rd-4th and 5th-6th
shifting insert to avoid misassembly.
PCIB0608E
c. Install snap ring to reverse synchronizer hub.

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse snap ring.
• Do not align the snap ring notch with synchronizer hub
groove when assembling.
PCIB1237E
d. Press in reverse synchronizer hub assembly, reverse baulk ring,

reverse main gear and reverse main needle bearing using Tools.

: KV32103300 (J-46529)
CAUTION:
Apply gear oil to reverse baulk ring and reverse main nee-
dle bearing.
PCIB1268E
NOTE:

GEAR COMPONENTS
Reverse baulk ring has three spaces that two gear teeth are
missing, and each space has small ditch for identification as A
shown.
PCIB0168E
TM
E
End play : 0 - 0.10 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring. F
G
PCIB0225E
27. Press in reverse counter gear using Tool.

H
CAUTION: I
• Do not reverse counter gear.
• Be careful with the orientation counter gear.
J
PCIB1269E
K
L
End play : 0 - 0.10 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring. M
N
PCIB0226E
29. Install reverse idler shaft assembly according to the following. O

a. Install reverse idler needle bearing, reverse idler gear and reverse idler thrust washer to reverse idler
shaft.
CAUTION: P
Apply gear oil to reverse idler needle bearing.

GEAR COMPONENTS
b. Install reverse idler shaft assembly to adapter plate.
PCIB1326E

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [6MT: FS6R31A]

B
Engine VQ40DE
C
Transmission model FS6R31A
Axle type 2WD 4WD
Number of speed 6 TM
Synchromesh type Warner
Shift pattern
F
SCIA0955E
G
1st 4.368
2nd 2.518
3rd 1.743 H
Gear ratio
4th 1.283
5th 1.000
6th 0.769 I
Reverse 3.966
Drive 24
J
1st 37
2nd 32
Main gear
(Number of teeth) 3rd 32 K
4th 29
6th 25
L
Reverse 42
Drive 34
1st 12 M
2nd 18
Counter gear
(Number of teeth) 3rd 26
N
4th 32
6th 46
Reverse 15 O
Reverse idler gear (Number of teeth) 26
Oil capacity (Approximate) (US pt, Imp pt) 4.0 (8-3/8, 7) 4.2 (8-7/8, 7-3/8)
P
Reverse synchronizer Installed
Remarks Double cone synchronizer 1st, 3rd and 4th
Triple cone synchronizer 2nd

Gear End Play INFOID:0000000009480460
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard value

Counter gear 0 - 0.10 (0 - 0.004)
Main drive gear 0 - 0.10 (0 - 0.004)
Mainshaft (Front side) 0 - 0.10 (0 - 0.004)
Mainshaft (Rear side) 0 - 0.10 (0 - 0.004)
Snap Rings INFOID:0000000009480461
Unit: mm (in)
Selective parts Thickness Part number*
1.89 (0.0744) 32204 01G60
1.95 (0.0768) 32204 01G61
1.99 (0.0783) 32204 01G62
Main drive gear
2.03 (0.0799) 32204 01G63
2.07 (0.0815) 32204 01G64
2.11 (0.0831) 32204 01G65
1.96 (0.0772) 32236 CD000
2.02 (0.0795) 32236 CD001
2.08 (0.0819) 32236 CD002
2.14 (0.0843) 32236 CD003
2.20 (0.0866) 32236 CD004
2.26 (0.0890) 32236 CD005
Counter gear
2.32 (0.0913) 32236 CD006
2.38 (0.0937) 32236 CD007
2.44 (0.0961) 32236 CD008
2.50 (0.0984) 32236 CD009
2.56 (0.1008) 32236 CD010
2.62 (0.1031) 32236 CD011
2.08 (0.0819) 32204 CD000
2.14 (0.0843) 32204 CD001
Front side
2.20 (0.0866) 32204 CD002
2.26 (0.0890) 32204 CD003
2.08 (0.0819) 32204 CD000
2.14 (0.0843) 32204 CD001
2.20 (0.0866) 32204 CD002
2.26 (0.0890) 32204 CD003
2.32 (0.0913) 32204 CD004
Mainshaft 2.38 (0.0937) 32204 CD005
2.44 (0.0961) 32204 CD006
2.50 (0.0984) 32204 CD007
Rear side
2.56 (0.1008) 32204 CD008
2.62 (0.1031) 32204 CD009
2.68 (0.1055) 32204 CD010
2.74 (0.1079) 32204 CD011
2.80 (0.1102) 32204 CD012
2.86 (0.1126) 32204 CD013
2.92 (0.1150) 32204 CD014
2.98 (0.1173) 32204 CD015
Baulk Ring Clearance INFOID:0000000009480462
Unit: mm (in)

Measurement point Standard value Limit value
A
1st, 3rd and 4th Clearance between synchronizer 0.5 - 0.7 (0.020 - 0.028) 0.3 (0.012)
(Double-cone synchronizer) cone and inner baulk ring end face
“A”
Clearance between outer baulk ring 1st: 1.0 - 1.5 (0.039 - 0.059) 0.7 (0.028) B
pawl and synchronizer cone “B” 3rd, 4th: 0.85 - 1.35 (0.0335 - 0.0531) 0.7 (0.028)
PCIB0249E TM
2nd Clearance between synchronizer 0.6 - 1.3 (0.024 - 0.051) 0.3 (0.012)
(Triple-cone synchronizer) and clutch gear end face “A”
Clearance between outer baulk ring 0.85 - 1.35 (0.0335 - 0.0531) 0.7 (0.028)
E
pawl and synchronizer cone “B”
Clearance between inner baulk ring 0.7 - 1.25 (0.028 - 0.0492) 0.3 (0.012)
and clutch gear end face “C” F
PCIB0835J
G
5th and 6th 0.7 - 1.35 (0.028 - 0.0531) 0.5 (0.020)
Reverse 0.75 - 1.2 (0.0295 - 0.047) 0.5 (0.020)
H

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [5AT: RE5R05A]
BASIC INSPECTION
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair INFOID:0000000009480463
INTRODUCTION
The TCM receives a signal from the output speed sensor, accelera-
tor pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor) or transmission
range switch. Then provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T
solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capa-
ble of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store mal-
functions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good oper-
SAT631IB
ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunc-
tion, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused
by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful
checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of
good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the “DETAILED FLOW”.
SAT632I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a

customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such errors, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic work sheet” as shown on
the example (Refer to TM-129) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.
SEF234G
DETAILED FLOW
1.COLLECT THE INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using diagnosis worksheet. Refer to TM-129, "Diagnostic Work Sheet".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM 1
Check the following items based on the information obtained from the customer.
• Fail-safe. Refer to TM-230, "Fail-Safe".
• A/T fluid inspection. Refer to TM-269, "Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF)".
• Stall test. Refer to TM-275, "Stall Test".
• Line pressure test. Refer to TM-276, "Line Pressure Test".
>> GO TO 3. A
3.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC. B
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
• Record DTC.
• Erase DTC. Refer to TM-155, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
C
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 6.
TM
4.PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Perform “Diagnosis Procedure” for the displayed DTC.
E
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4. G
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK SYMPTOM 2
H
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Is any malfunction present?
YES >> GO TO 7. I
NO >> Inspection End
7.ROAD TEST
Perform “ROAD TEST”. Refer to TM-279, "Check Before Engine Is Started". J
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK SYMPTOM 3 K
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.

Is any malfunction present? L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Inspection End
M
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000009480464
INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER

N
KEY POINTS
• WHAT..... Vehicle and A/T model
• WHEN..... Date, Frequencies O
• WHERE..... Road conditions
• HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name MR/MS Model and Year VIN P

Trans. Model Engine Mileage
Malfunction Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency Continuous Intermittent ( times a day)

Symptoms Vehicle does not move. ( Any position Particular position)
No up-shift ( 1st → 2nd 2nd → 3rd 3rd → 4th 4th → 5th)
No down-shift ( 5th → 4th 4th → 3rd 3rd → 2nd 2nd → 1st)
Lock-up malfunction
Shift point too high or too low.
Shift shock or slip ( N → D N → R Lock-up Any drive position)
Noise or vibration
No kick down
No pattern select
Cannot be changed to manual mode
Others
( )
O/D OFF indicator lamp Continuously lit Not lit
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) Continuously lit Not lit
DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET
1 Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. TM-230
A/T fluid inspection, stall test and line pressure test
A/T fluid inspection
Leak (Repair leak location.) TM-269
State
Amount
Stall test
2 1st one-way clutch

Torque converter one-way clutch
3rd one-way clutch
Front brake
Engine
High and low reverse clutch TM-275
Line pressure low
Low coast brake
Except for input
Forward brake
clutch and direct clutch,
Reverse brake
clutches and brakes
Forward one-way clutch
OK
Line pressure test - Suspected part: TM-276
3 Perform self-diagnosis. — Check detected items to repair or replace malfunctioning part. TM-157
Perform road test.
5-1 Check before engine is started TM-279
5-2 Check at idle TM-279
Part 1 TM-280
4
5-3 Cruise test Part 2 TM-282
Part 3 TM-282
Check malfunction phenomena to repair or replace malfunctioning part after completing all road test.
Refer to TM-242, "Symptom Chart".
5 Drive vehicle to check that the malfunction phenomenon has been resolved.
6 Erase the results of the self-diagnosis from the TCM and the ECM. TM-155

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY : Descrip-
B
tion INFOID:0000000010169202
When replacing transmission assembly, save current TCM data using CONSULT before replacement.
C
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY : Special
Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000010169203
TM
1.SAVE TCM DATA
With CONSULT
Save the TCM data according to the CONSULT display. E
NOTE:
Even when TCM data is not saved in CONSULT, GO TO 2.
F
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
G
Replace the transmission assembly. Refer to TM-306, "Removal and Installation for QR25DE", TM-308,
"Removal and Installation for VQ40DE 2WD Models", TM-310, "Removal and Installation for VQ40DE 4WD
Models".
H
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM TCM PROGRAMMING I
With CONSULT
1. During programming, maintain the following conditions:
J
Ignition switch : ON
Selector lever :P
Engine speed : 0 rpm K
ATF temp. : 72°C (161°F) or less
2. Perform programming according to the CONSULT display.
3. After completing the programming, maintain the following conditions and turn ignition switch ON → OFF L
→ ON → OFF.
Brake pedal : Depressed M

Selector lever :R
Accelerator pedal : 2.0/8
ATF temp. : 72°C (161°F) or less N
>> GO TO 4.
4.CONFIRM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR O
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Shift the selector lever to P position.
P
3. Shift the selector lever to P → R → N → D → P, confirm the shift position indicator shows correct shift
position.
>> WORK END

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [5AT: RE5R05A]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000009480465
2WD models
SCIA5267E
1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear

4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake
10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump
13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Rear extension 20. Output shaft

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
4WD models
A
TM
H
SCIA5268E
1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear

4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake I
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake
10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump
13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch J
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Adapter case 20. Output shaft
K
Shift Mechanism INFOID:0000000009480466
The automatic transmission uses compact triple planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission effi- L
ciency, simplify construction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and super wide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and
acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
M
CONSTRUCTION

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
PCIA0002J
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Name of the Part Abbreviation Function

Front brake (1) FR/B Fastens the front sun gear (11).
Connects the input shaft (12), the front internal gear (14) and the mid internal
Input clutch (2) I/C
gear (13).
Direct clutch (3) D/C Connects the rear carrier (15) and the rear sun gear (16).
High and low reverse clutch (4) HLR/C Connects the mid sun gear (17) and the rear sun gear (16).
Reverse brake (5) R/B Fastens the rear carrier (15).
Forward brake (6) Fwd/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Low coast brake (7) LC/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Allows the rear sun gear (16) to turn freely forward relative to the mid sun gear
1st one-way clutch (8) 1st WOC
(17) but fastens it for reverse rotation.
Allows the mid sun gear (17) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it
Forward one-way clutch (9) Fwd OWC
for reverse rotation.
Allows the front sun gear (11) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens
3rd one-way clutch (10) 3rd OWC
it for reverse rotation.
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
1st Fwd 3rd

Shift position I/C HLR/C D/C R/B FR/B LC/B Fwd/B Remarks
OWC OWC OWC
P PARK POSITION
REVERSE POSI-
R
TION

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
1st Fwd 3rd
Shift position I/C HLR/C D/C R/B FR/B LC/B Fwd/B Remarks
OWC OWC OWC A
NEUTRAL POSI-
N
TION
1st B
2nd
Automatic shift
D*1 3rd C
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5
4th
5th TM
1st
2nd
3
Automatic shift E
3rd 1⇔2⇔3⇐4
4th
F
1st
2nd Automatic shift

2 G
3rd 1⇔2⇐3⇐4
4th
1st H
2nd Locks (held sta-

1 tionary in 1GR)
3rd 1⇐2⇐3⇐4 I
4th
• —Operates J
• —Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
• —Operates and effects power transmission while coasting.
K
• —Line pressure is applied but does not affect power transmission.
• —Operates under conditions shown in HLR/C Operating Condition
• —Operates under conditions shown in LC/B Operating Condition. Delay control is applied during D (4,3,2,1) ⇒N shift. L
• *1: A/T will not shift to 5th when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position.
SCIA5642E
POWER TRANSMISSION P
“N” Position
Since both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not trans-
mitted to the output shaft.
“P” Position
• The same as for the “N” position, both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, so torque from
the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
• The parking pawl linked with the select lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
PCIA0003J

"D1", “31" and “21” Positions

• The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
• The 1st one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
• During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and the engine
brake is not activated.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
H
SCIA1512E

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake I
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier J
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl K
"11" Position
• The front brake fastens the front sun gear. L
• High and low reverse clutch connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
• The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
• During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine brake M
functions.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
SCIA1513E

"D2" and “32” Positions

• The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
• The direct clutch is coupled and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
• During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and engine brake is
not activated.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
H
SCIA1514E

"22" and “12” Positions

• The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
• The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
• During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine brake M
functions.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
SCIA1515E

"D3" and “33” Positions

• The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
• The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
• The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
H
SCIA1516E

"D4" Position
• The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. L
• The input clutch is coupled and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
• The drive power is conveyed to the front internal gear, mid internal gear, and rear carrier and the three plan-
etary gears rotate forward as one unit. M

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
SCIA1517E

"D5" Position
• The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
• The input clutch is coupled and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
H
SCIA4984E

“R” Position
• The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
• The reverse brake fastens the rear carrier.
M

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
SCIA1519E

TCM Function INFOID:0000000009480467
The function of the TCM is to:

• Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
• Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the opti-
mum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
SENSORS (or SIGNALS) TCM ACTUATORS A

Transmission range switch
Input clutch solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Shift control Direct clutch solenoid valve
Closed throttle position signal
Line pressure control Front brake solenoid valve B
Wide open throttle position signal
Lock-up control High and low reverse clutch sole-
Engine speed signal
Engine brake control noid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor ⇒ ⇒
Timing control Low coast brake solenoid valve
Output speed sensor C
Fail-safe control Torque converter clutch solenoid
Vehicle speed signal
Self-diagnosis valve
Stop lamp switch signal
CONSULT communication line Line pressure solenoid valve
Input speed sensor
Duet-EA control O/D OFF indicator lamp
1st position switch signal
CAN system Starter relay
TM
Overdrive control switch signal
Back-up lamp relay
ATF pressure switch signal
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM E
L
JSDIA2262GB
CAN Communication INFOID:0000000009480468 M
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- N
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. O
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. For details, refer to LAN-53,
"CAN System Specification Chart".
P

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Input/Output Signal of TCM INFOID:0000000009480469
Line Vehicle Engine Fail-safe Self-diag-

Shift Lock-up
Control item pressure speed brake function nostics
control control
control control control (*3) function
Accelerator pedal position signal (*5) X X X X X X X

Output speed sensor X X X X X X X
Vehicle speed signal(*1) (*5) X
Closed throttle position signal(*5) X(*2) X X X X(*4)
Wide open throttle position signal(*5) X X(*4)

Input speed sensor 1 X X X X X
Input Input speed sensor 2

X X X X X
(for 4th speed only)
Engine speed signals(*5) X X X X X X X
Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X X X X(*4)

A/T fluid temperature sensor X X X X X X
(*5) X X X
Operation signal
ASCD Overdrive cancel sig-
X
nal(*5)
Direct clutch solenoid X X X X
Input clutch solenoid X X X X
High and low reverse clutch sole-
X X X X
noid
Front brake solenoid X X X X
Output Low coast brake solenoid
X X X X X
(ATF pressure switch 2)
Line pressure solenoid X X X X X X X
TCC solenoid X X X
O/D OFF indictor lamp(*6) X(*4)

Starter relay X X
*1: Spare for output speed sensor.
*2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal.
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnosis; if self-diagnosis is not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error.
*5: Input by CAN communications.
*6: Output by CAN communications.
Line Pressure Control INFOID:0000000009480470
• When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine drive force is sent from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM
controls the line pressure solenoid.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
• This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pres-
sure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving A
state.
TM
PCIA0007E
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PAT-
TERN E
• The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
driving state.
• In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM F
controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
Normal Control
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the G
engine drive force.
PCIA0008E J
Back-up Control (Engine Brake)
When the select operation is performed during driving and the trans-
mission is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the K
vehicle speed.
PCIA0009E
N
During Shift Change

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to input
torque and shift selector selection. Also, line pressure characteristic
is set according to engine speed, during engine brake operation.
PCIA0010E
At Low Fluid Temperature

When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera-
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.
PCIA0011E
Shift Control INFOID:0000000009480471
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained.
PCIA0012E
SHIFT CHANGE
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa-
tion, etc.
Shift Change System Diagram

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
PCIA0013E F
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure at real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
G
Lock-up Control INFOID:0000000009480472
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to H
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston. I
Lock-up Operation Condition Table (QR25DE Models)
Select lever D position 3 position 2 position
J
Gear position 5 4 3 3 2
Lock-up × – – – –
Slip lock-up – – – – – K
Lock-up Operation Condition Table (VQ40DE Models)
Select lever D position 3 position 2 position
Gear position 5 4 3 3 2 L
Lock-up × × – – –
Slip lock-up – – × – –
M
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
Lock-up Control System Diagram
N
PCIA0014E
Lock-up Released
• In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Lock-up Applied
• In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-clutched State
• The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to gradually increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into
half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control
• In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 4GR and 5GR at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low
degree of opening.
Engine Brake Control INFOID:0000000009480473
• The forward one-way clutch transmits the drive force from the engine to the rear wheels. But the reverse
drive from the rear wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch is idling.
Therefore, the low coast brake solenoid is operated to prevent the forward one-way clutch from idling and
the engine brake is operated in the same manner as conventionally.
SCIA1520E
• The operation of the low coast brake solenoid switches the low coast brake switching valve and controls the
coupling and releasing of the low coast brake.
The low coast brake reducing valve controls the low coast brake coupling force.
Control Valve INFOID:0000000009480474
FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE
Name Function
In order to prevent the pressure supplied to the torque converter from being excessive,
Torque converter regulator valve the line pressure is adjusted to the optimum pressure (torque converter operating pres-
sure).
Pressure regulator valve
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for
Pressure regulator plug
the driving state.
Pressure regulator sleeve

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Name Function
A
When the front brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (front
Front brake control valve brake pressure) and supplies it to the front brake. (In 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, and 5GR, adjusts
the clutch pressure.)
Adjusts the pressure (accumulator control pressure) acting on the accumulator piston B
Accumulator control valve
and low coast reducing valve to the pressure appropriate to the driving state.
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
Pilot valve A
for line pressure control, shift change control, and lock-up control. C
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
Pilot valve B
for shift change control.
Low coast brake switching valve During engine braking, supplies the line pressure to the low coast brake reducing valve. TM
When the low coast brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Low coast brake reducing valve
(low coast brake pressure) and supplies it to the low coast brake.
N-R accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-R is selected. E
Direct clutch piston switching valve Operates in 4GR and switches the direct clutch coupling capacity.
When the high and low reverse clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the opti-
High and low reverse clutch control valve mum pressure (high and low reverse clutch pressure) and supplies it to the high and low F
reverse clutch. (In 1GR, 3GR, 4GR and 5GR, adjusts the clutch pressure.)
When the input clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (in-
Input clutch control valve put clutch pressure) and supplies it to the input clutch. (In 4GR and 5GR, adjusts the G
clutch pressure.)
When the direct clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (di-
Direct clutch control valve rect clutch pressure) and supplies it to the direct clutch. (In 2GR, 3GR, and 4GR, adjusts H
the clutch pressure.)
TCC control valve
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by performing the lock-up operation
TCC control plug
TCC control sleeve
transiently, lock-up smoothly. I
Operates during lock-up to switch the torque converter, cooling, and lubrication system
Torque converter lubrication valve
oil path.
J
Cool bypass valve Allows excess oil to bypass cooler circuit without being fed into it.
Line pressure relief valve Discharges excess oil from line pressure circuit.
N-D accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-D is selected. K
Sends line pressure to each circuit according to the select position. The circuits to which
Manual valve
the line pressure is not sent drain.
FUNCTION OF PRESSURE SWITCH L
Name Function
M
Detects any malfunction in the low coast brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any
Pressure switch 2 (LC/B)
malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T Electrical Parts Location INFOID:0000000009480475
AWDIA0965ZZ
1. O/D OFF indicator lamp 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor 3. Accelerator pedal
4. Control valve with TCM*1 5. A/T assembly harness connector 6. 1st position switch
7. Overdrive control switch
*1: The following components are included in the control valve with TCM.
• TCM (transmission control module)
• Input speed sensor 1
• Input speed sensor 2
• Output speed sensor

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
• Transmission range switch A
• Line pressure solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve B
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve C
• Low coast brake solenoid valve
• ATF pressure switch 2
TM

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000009480476
• The selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (Park) unless the brake pedal is applied and the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position.
• Battery voltage is supplied to the shift lock solenoid by the stop lamp switch.
• Ground is supplied to the shift lock solenoid by the park position switch (shift selector).
• With the the ignition switch “ON”, brake pedal applied and the A/T shift selector in “P” (Park), the shift lock
solenoid is energized, allowing the selector lever to be shifted from Park.
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000009480477
AWDIA0735GB
1. A/T shift selector 2. Shift lock solenoid 3. Park position switch (shift selector)
4. Stop lamp switch E39

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
A
Introduction INFOID:0000000009480478
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. B

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is C
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail,
refer to TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
TM
OBD-II Function for A/T System INFOID:0000000009480479
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the E
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
F
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II INFOID:0000000009480480
G
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in H
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC I
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd Trip
J
The “Trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) INFOID:0000000009480481
K
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. L
( with CONSULT or GST) CONSULT or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. M
• Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or
occurred in the past and returned to normal. N
CONSULT can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT (if available) is recommended.
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated O
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
P
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to TM-155.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no

longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
• If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
• When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-55, "On Board Diagnosis Function" (QR25DE) or EC-515, "On
Board Diagnosis Function" (VQ40DE).
• Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT)

1. The emission related diagnostic information in the TCM and ECM can be erased by selecting “ALL Erase”
in the “Description” of “FINAL CHECK” mode with CONSULT.
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Select Mode 4 with the Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details refer to EC-47, "GST (Generic Scan Tool)"
(QR25DE) or EC-507, "GST (Generic Scan Tool)" (VQ40DE).
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
1. Disconnect battery for 24 hours.
2. Reconnect battery.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000009480482
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned “ON” with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
• If the MIL does not light up, refer to MWI-4, "Work Flow".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
A
CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000009480483
FUNCTION B
TCM diagnostic mode Description

Self Diagnostic Result Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items. C
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
CAN Diagnosis The condition of CAN communication can be indicated by a topology.
TM
CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor It monitors the status of CAN communication.
DTC work support DTC reproduction procedure can be performed speedily and precisely.
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system. E
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE
Display Items List F
X: Applicable, —: Not applicable
TCM self-diag-
OBD-II (DTC)
nosis G
Items (CONSULT MIL indicator Reference
Malfunction is detected when... “TRANSMIS- lamp*1, “EN-
screen terms) page
SION” with GINE” with
H
CONSULT CONSULT or
GST
• When a malfunction is detected in CAN communica-
LOST COMM (ECM A) U0100 U0100 TM-165 I
tions (ECM).
• When TCM is not transmitting or receiving CAN com-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 TM-166
munication signal for 2 seconds or more.
• If this signal is ON other than in “P” or “N” position, this J
is judged to be a malfunction.
STARTER RELAY P0615 — TM-167
(And if it is OFF in “P” or “N” position, this too is judged
to be a malfunction.)
K
TRANSMISSION CONT • TCM is malfunctioning. P0700 P0700 TM-169
• Transmission range switch 1-4 signals input with im-
T/M RANGE SENSOR possible pattern L
P0705 P0705 TM-170
A • “P” position is detected from “N” position without any
other position being detected in between.
• TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from
INPUT SPEED SEN- the sensor. M
P0717 P0717 TM-172
SOR A • TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4GR for
input speed sensor 2.
• Signal from output speed sensor not input due to cut N
line or the like
OUTPUT SPEED SEN- • Unexpected signal input during running
P0720 P0720 TM-174
SOR • After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpected signal
input from vehicle speed signal before the vehicle O
starts moving
• TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal
ENGINE SPEED P0725 — TM-177
from the ECM. P
1GR INCORRECT RA-
• A/T cannot shift to 1GR P0731 P0731 TM-180
TIO
2GR INCORRECT RA-
TIO
3GR INCORRECT RA-
TIO

TCM self-diag-
OBD-II (DTC)
nosis

screen terms) page
SION” with GINE” with
CONSULT CONSULT or
GST
4GR INCORRECT RA-
TIO
5GR INCORRECT RA-
TIO
• Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 P0740 TM-189
short, or the like
• A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is
good.
TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 P0744*2 TM-191
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference val-
ue with slip rotation.
short, or the like
PC SOLENOID A P0745 P0745 TM-193
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value
with monitor value.
• TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal
TP SENSOR position signals (input by CAN communication) from P1705 — TM-195
ECM.
TRANS FLUID TEMP • During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal
P1710 P0710 TM-197
SEN voltage is excessively high or low
• Signal (CAN communication) from vehicle speed sig-
VEHICLE SPEED SIG-
nal not input due to cut line or the like P1721 — TM-200
NAL
• Unexpected signal input during running
• Except during shift change, the gear position and ATF
INTERLOCK pressure switch states are monitored and compara- P1730 P1730 TM-202
tive judgment made.
• Each ATF pressure switch and solenoid current is
monitored and if a pattern is detected having engine
1ST E/BRAKING P1731 — TM-204
braking 1GR other than in the “1” position, a malfunc-
tion is detected.
• Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to func-
tional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
INPUT CLUTCH SOL P1752 P1752 TM-206
with monitor value.
FR BRAKE SOLENOID P1757 P1757 TM-208
with monitor value.
short, or the like
DRCT CLUTCH SOL P1762 P1762 TM-210
with monitor value.
HLR CLUTCH SOLE- tional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
P1767 P1767 TM-212
NOID • TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value
with monitor value.
L C BRAKE SOLENOID P1772 P1772 TM-214

TCM self-diag-
OBD-II (DTC)
nosis A
screen terms) page
SION” with GINE” with B
CONSULT CONSULT or
GST
• TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to
operate the solenoid valve.
C
L C BRAKE SOLENOID • Condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is different from P1774 P1774*2 TM-216
monitor value, and relation between gear position and
actual gear ratio is irregular. TM
NO DTC IS DETECTED
FURTHER TESTING • No NG item has been detected. X X —
MAY BE REQUIRED
E
*1: Refer to TM-156, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".
*2:These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
DATA MONITOR MODE F

Display Items List
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable G
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
Monitor Item Selection
H
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM I
NALS
MENU
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) X X Output speed sensor
J
VHCL/S SE-MTR (km/h or mph) X —
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — Accelerator pedal position signal

Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by K
the TCM
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X
For fail-safe operation, the specific value used
for control is displayed.
L
CLSD THL POS (ON-OFF display) X —
Signal input with CAN communications
W/O THL POS (ON-OFF display) X —
M
BRAKESW (ON-OFF display) X — Stop lamp switch
Gear position recognized by the TCM updated
GEAR — X
after gear-shifting
N
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X
INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X

O
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X
GEAR RATIO — X
Difference between engine speed and torque

P
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X
converter input shaft speed
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — —
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — —
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) X —

SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
MENU
ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F) — X
ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F) — X
BATTERY VOLT (V) X —
ATF PRES SW 1 (ON-OFF display) X X
ATF PRES SW 2 (ON-OFF display) X X (for LC/B solenoid)
RANGE SW 1 (ON-OFF display) X —
1 POSITION SW (ON-OFF display) X — 1st position switch
Selector lever position is recognized by the TCM.

SLCT LVR POSI — X For fail-safe operation, the specific value used
for control is displayed.
OD CONT SW (ON-OFF display) X —
POWERSHIFT SW (ON-OFF display) X —
HOLD SW (ON-OFF display) X —
DS RANGE (ON-OFF display) — —
MANU MODE SW (ON-OFF display) X —
NON M-MODE SW (ON-OFF display) X — Not mounted but displayed.
UP SW LEVER (ON-OFF display) X —
DOWN SW LEVER (ON-OFF display) X —
SFT UP ST SW (ON-OFF display) — —
SFT DWN ST SW (ON-OFF display) — —
ASCD-OD CUT (ON-OFF display) — —
ASCD-CRUISE (ON-OFF display) — —
ABS SIGNAL (ON-OFF display) — —
ACC OD CUT (ON-OFF display) — —

Not mounted but displayed.
ACC SIGNAL (ON-OFF display) — —
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON-OFF display) — —
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON-OFF display) — —
TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON-OFF display) — —
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X
LINE PRES SOL (A) — X

A
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
MENU B
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X

C
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X
HLR/C SOL (A) — X

TM
ON OFF SOL (ON-OFF display) — — LC/B solenoid
TCC SOL MON (A) — —

E
L/P SOL MON (A) — —
I/C SOL MON (A) — —
FR/B SOL MON (A) — — F

D/C SOL MON (A) — —
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — — G

ON OFF SOL MON (ON-OFF display) — — LC/B solenoid
P POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — H

R POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — —
N POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — —

I
D POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — —
4TH POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — —

J
3RD POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — —
2ND POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — —

K
1ST POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — —
MANU MODE IND (ON-OFF display) — —

Not mounted but displayed.
POWER M LAMP (ON-OFF display) — — L
F-SAFE IND/L (ON-OFF display) — —
ATF WARN LAMP (ON-OFF display) — — M

BACK-UP LAMP (ON-OFF display) — —
STARTER RELAY (ON-OFF display) — — N

RANGE SW 3M (ON-OFF display) — —
C/V CLB ID1 — —

O
C/V CLB ID2 — —
C/V CLB ID3 — —

P
UNIT CLB ID1 — —
TRGT GR RATIO — —
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —

SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
MENU
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
SHIFT PATTERN — —
DRV CST JUDGE — —
START RLY MON (ON-OFF display) — —
NEXT GR POSI — —
SHIFT MODE — —
MANU GR POSI — —
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
DTC WORK SUPPORT

Display Items List
DTC work support item Description Check item

Following items for “1GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed
1ST GR FNCTN P0731
or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
2ND GR FNCTN P0732
or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 • High and low reverse clutch
or not)
solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
Following items for “4GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Hydraulic control circuit
4TH GR FNCTN P0734
or not)
5TH GR FNCTN P0735
or not)
Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT INFOID:0000000009480484
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)

Refer to TM-156, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Description

When the ignition switch is switched “ON”, the O/D OFF indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds. As a method
for locating the suspect circuit, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for the malfunction A
location is output and the O/D OFF indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding DTC.
Diagnostic Procedure
1.CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP B
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF at least twice, then leave it in the OFF position.
C
3. Wait 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
TM
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to TM-242, "Symptom Chart".
2.JUDGMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1 E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Keep pressing shift lock release button.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position. F
4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal “ON”.)
5. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
7. Wait 3 seconds. G
8. Move the selector lever from “D” to “3” position.
9. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.)
10. Move the selector lever from “3” to “2” position. H
11. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
12. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.)
13. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
I
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE J
Check O/D OFF indicator lamp.
Refer to "Judgment Self-diagnosis Code".
If the system does not go into self-diagnostics. Refer to TM-170, "Diagnosis Procedure", TM-220, "Diagnosis K
Procedure", TM-221, "Diagnosis Procedure".
>> DIAGNOSIS END L

Judgment Self-diagnosis Code

If there is a malfunction, the lamp lights up for the time corresponding to the suspect circuit.
JSDIA1433GB
No. Malfunctioning item No. Malfunctioning item

1 Output speed sensor TM-174 12 Interlock TM-202
2 Direct clutch solenoid TM-210 13 1st engine braking TM-204
3 Torque converter TM-189, TM-191 14 Starter relay TM-167
4 Line pressure solenoid TM-193 15 TP sensor TM-195
5 Input clutch solenoid TM-206 16 Engine speed TM-177
6 Front brake solenoid TM-208 17 CAN communication line TM-166
7 Low coast brake solenoid TM-214, TM-216 18 1GR incorrect ratio TM-179
8 High and low reverse clutch solenoid TM-212 19 2GR incorrect ratio TM-181
9 Transmission range switch TM-170 20 3GR incorrect ratio TM-183
10 Transmission fluid temperature sensor TM-197 21 4GR incorrect ratio TM-185
11 Input speed sensor TM-172 22 5GR incorrect ratio TM-187
Erase Self-diagnosis
• In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is
stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how
many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
• However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch OFF after executing self-diagnostics or by
erasing the memory using the CONSULT.

U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [5AT: RE5R05A]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A)
B
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links C
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. TM
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000009480486
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

• Diagnostic trouble code “U0100” with CONSULT is detected when TCM is unable to receive the CAN com-
munications signal from ECM.
Possible Cause INFOID:0000000009480487 F
• ECM
• Harness or connectors G
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000009480488
H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
I
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) J
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
3. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to TM-165, "Diagnosis Procedure".
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT”.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009480489
L
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

M
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. N
Is “U0100” detected?
YES >> Go to LAN section. Refer to LAN-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> INSPECTION END O

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

• Diagnostic trouble code “U1000” with CONSULT or 17th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected
when TCM cannot communicate to other control units.
Possible Cause INFOID:0000000009480492
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
3. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds.
WITH GST
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
Is any malfunction of the “U1000” indicated?
YES >> Go to LAN section. Refer to LAN-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> INSPECTION END

P0615 STARTER RELAY
P0615 STARTER RELAY
A
TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position. B

CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000009480496
C
Item name Condition Display value
Selector lever in “N”, “P” positions. ON
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other position. OFF TM
E
• This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “P0615” with CONSULT or 14th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected
when starter relay is switched “ON” other than at “P” or “N” position. (Or when switched “OFF” at “P” or “N”
position). F
G
• Harness or connectors
(The starter relay and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
• Starter relay
H
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” I
J
WITH CONSULT
1. Shift selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for at least 2 seconds.
3. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. K
L
1.CHECK STARTER RELAY
With CONSULT M
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for "TRANSMISSION" with CONSULT
and check monitor “STARTER RELAY” ON/OFF.
N
Without CONSULT
2. Check voltage between the IPDM E/R connector and ground. O
Voltage (Ap-
Item Connector Terminal Shift position P
prox.)
“N” and “P” Battery voltage
Starter relay E122 48 Ground
“R” and “D” 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
LCIA0320E

P0615 STARTER RELAY
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR AND IPDM E/R CONNECTOR
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector and
IPDM E/R connector.
Item Connector Terminal Continuity

A/T assembly harness
F9 9
connector Yes
IPDM E/R connector E122 48
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG SCIA6254E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector ter-
minal and TCM connector terminal.

A/T assembly harness
F9 9
connector Yes
TCM connector F502 8
OK or NG SCIA5440E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
• Starter relay, Refer to STR-12.
• IPDM E/R, Refer to PCS-3, "System Description".
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation".
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK DTC
Perform TM-167, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
A
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The B
TCM controls the A/T.
C
• Diagnostic trouble code “P0700” with CONSULT is detected when the TCM is malfunctioning.
Possible Cause INFOID:0000000009480503 TM
TCM.
E
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” F
WITH CONSULT G
3. Start engine. H
4. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
WITH GST I
J
1.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT K
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. L
5. Perform TM-169, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
Is the “P0700” displayed again?
YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation". M
NO >> INSPECTION END

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.

Selector lever in “N”,“P” positions. N/P
Selector lever in “R” position. R
Selector lever in “D” position. D
SLCTLVR POSI
Selector lever in “3” position. 3

• Diagnostic trouble code “P0705” with CONSULT or 9th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under
the following conditions.
- When TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the transmission range switch 1, 2, 3, 4 based
on the gear position.
- When no other position but “P” position is detected from “N” positions.
(The transmission range switch 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
• Transmission range switch 1, 2, 3, 4
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8
WITH GST
1.CHECKTRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
3. Check if correct selector lever position (N/P, R, D, 3, 2 or 1) is displayed as selector lever is moved into
each position.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. A
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
B
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-218, "Diagnosis Procedure".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. C
Check the following. TM
• A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. E
4.CHECK SUB-HARNESS F
2. Disconnect transmission range switch connector and TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between transmission range switch connector
(A) terminals and TCM connector (B) terminals. G

H
Transmission range switch con-
F505 1
nector Yes
I
F505 2
nector Yes
TCM connector F503 11 JSDIA1328GB
J
F505 3
nector Yes
TCM connector F503 12 K
F505 5
nector Yes
TCM connector F503 14 L
OK or NG M
5.CHECK DTC N
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.

• Refer to TM-170, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". O
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. P

P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the
automatic transmission. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
Item name Condition Display value (rpm)

INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.

under the following conditions.
- When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
- When TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4GR for input speed sensor 2.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
ENGINE SPEED: 1,500 rpm or more
ACCELE POSI: 0.5/8 or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR (Input speed sensor 1): 4th or 5th position
GEAR (Input speed sensor 2): All position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
WITH GST
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “INPUT SPEED”.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. A
NG >> GO TO 2.
B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. C
• The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation". E
4.CHECK DTC F
• Refer to TM-172, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG G
NG >> GO TO 2.
H

P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
The output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal
is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
Item name Condition Display value (km/h)

VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.

• Diagnostic trouble code “P0720” with CONSULT or 1st judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under
- After ignition switch is turned “ON”, irregular signal input from vehicle speed signal before the vehicle starts
moving.
• Output speed sensor
• Vehicle speed signal
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
3. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” value in response to “VHCL/S SE-MTR”
value.
If the check result is NG, go to TM-175, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
ENGINE SPEED: 3,500 rpm or more

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT”. A
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNAL B
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. C
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed. TM
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
E
NG >> GO TO 2.
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-218, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G
Check the following. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I
4.CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation". J
(A) terminals and TCM connector (B) terminals. K

Transmission range switch con- L
F505 8
nector Yes
Transmission range switch con- M
F505 9
nector Yes
TCM connector F503 17 JSDIA1329GB
Transmission range switch con- N

F505 10
nector Yes
O
OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE THE OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND CHECK DTC
1. Replace the output speed sensor. Refer to TM-313.
2. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to TM-174, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG

NG >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

P0725 ENGINE SPEED
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
A
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM. B
C
Item name Condition Display value (rpm)
ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
TM

• Diagnostic trouble code “P0725” with CONSULT or 16th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected E
when TCM does not receive the ignition signal from ECM during engine cranking or running.
F
(The ECM to the TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
G
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
NOTE:
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. J
ACCELE POSI: More than 1/8 K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009480529 L
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)". M
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to TM-166.
NO >> GO TO 2. N
2.CHECK DTC WITH TCM

With CONSULT O
1. Start engine.
3. While monitoring engine speed, check for engine speed change corresponding to wide-open throttle posi-
P
tion signal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check the ignition signal circuit.
• Refer to EC-446, "Diagnosis Procedure" (QR25DE) or EC-935, "Diagnosis Procedure"
(VQ40DE).

P0725 ENGINE SPEED
3.CHECK DTC
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation".

P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 1GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000009480531 C

when TCM detects any inconsistency in the actual gear ratio. TM
E
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve F
• Each clutch
• Hydraulic control circuit
G
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
I
WITH CONSULT
1. Start the engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. J
2. Make sure that “ATF TEMP 1” is within the following range.
ATF TEMP 1: 20°C – 180°C (68°F – 356°F)
If out of range, drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with K
CONSULT.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “1” position L
GEAR: “1” position
VEHICLE SPEED: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
ENGINE SPEED: INPUT SPEED − 50 rpm or more M
INPUT SPEED: 300 rpm or more
5. Keep the current driving status for at least 5 consecutive seconds if CONSULT screen changes from
“OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. N
CAUTION:
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case
a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
O
If “COMPLETED RESULT NG” is detected, go to TM-180, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If “STOP VEHICLE” is detected, go to the following step.
6. Stop vehicle.
7. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 5GR and check shift timing and shift shock. P
- Touch “OK” to complete the inspection when normally shifted from the 1GR to 5GR.
- Touch “NG” when an unusual shift shock, etc. occurs in spite of shifting from the 1GR to 5GR. Go to TM-
279, "Check Before Engine Is Started".
- Perform TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)" when not shifted from the 1GR to 5GR. (Nei-
ther “OK” nor “NG” are indicated.)
WITH GST
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Selector lever: “1” position
Gear position: “1” position
Accelerator opening: 0.6/8 or more
Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
4. Check DTC.

Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)", TM-162, "Diagnosis Pro-
cedure without CONSULT".
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to TM-166, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTION ITEM
Check A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
1. Replace control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation".
OK or NG
NG >> Confirm malfunction phenomena by “ROAD TEST” to repair malfunctioning part. Refer to TM-279,
"Check Before Engine Is Started".

A

E
• Each clutch
G
CAUTION:
NOTE:
I
WITH CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1: 20°C – 180°C (68°F – 356°F)
3. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with K
CONSULT.
CAUTION:
a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to “TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMIS-
O
SION)"”.
6. Stop vehicle. P
7. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 5GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
WITH GST
4. Check DTC.

NO >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG

A

E
• Each clutch
G
CAUTION:
NOTE:
I
WITH CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1: 20°C – 180°C (68°F – 356°F)
3. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with K
CONSULT.
CAUTION:
O
SION)"”.
6. Stop vehicle. P
WITH GST
4. Check DTC.

NO >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG

A

• Diagnostic trouble code “P0734” with CONSULT or 21st judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected
E
• Each clutch
G
CAUTION:
NOTE:
I
WITH CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1: 20°C – 180°C (68°F – 356°F)
3. Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with K
CONSULT.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position L
CAUTION:
O
SION)"”.
If “COMPLETED RESULT NG” is detected, go toTM-186, "Diagnosis Procedure".
6. Stop vehicle. P
WITH GST
Selector lever: “D” position
4. Check DTC.

NO >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG

A

• Diagnostic trouble code “P0735” with CONSULT or 22nd judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected
E
• Each clutch
G
CAUTION:
NOTE:
I
WITH CONSULT
ATF TEMP 1: 20°C – 180°C (68°F – 356°F)
3. Select “5TH GR FNCTN P0735” of “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with K
CONSULT.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position L
CAUTION:
O
SION)"”.
6. Stop vehicle. P
WITH GST
Selector lever: “D” position
4. Check DTC.

NO >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG

P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
A
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D4, D5 by the TCM in response to B
signals sent from the output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).
Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not C
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
TM
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

E
When performing slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
When performing lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 A

F

• Diagnostic trouble code “P0740” with CONSULT or 3rd judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under G
- When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
- When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
H
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve I

(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000009480559 J
CAUTION:
NOTE: K
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. L
WITH CONSULT
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. M
ACCELE POSI: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8 N
4. If DTC is detected go to TM-189, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT”. P

With CONSULT
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.

3. Start engine.
4. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

A
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction B
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000009480562 C

TM
When performing slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
When performing lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 A
E

• Diagnostic trouble code “P0744” with CONSULT or 3rd judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected under F
- When A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
- When TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation. G
• Harness or connectors H
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
• Hydraulic control circuit I
CAUTION: J
NOTE:
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. K
WITH CONSULT L
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR" mode for "TRANSMISSION" with CONSULT.
ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8 M
TCC SOLENOID: 0.4 - 0.6 A
VEHICLE SPEED: 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more N
Driving locations: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
O
WITH GST
P

With CONSULT

4. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
A
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in B
response to a signal sent from the TCM.

LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A TM
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

- When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. F
G
• Line pressure solenoid valve H
NOTE: I
J
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
2. Engine start and wait at least 5 second. K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT”. L
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNAL M
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. N
4. Read out the value of “LINE PRES SOL” while driving.
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

P1705 TP SENSOR
P1705 TP SENSOR
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle B
position sensor, etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends signals to TCM with CAN com-
munication.
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000009480574 C

TM
Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8
E

• Diagnostic trouble code “P1705” with CONSULT or 15th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected F
when TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input by CAN communication)
from ECM.
G
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) H
NOTE: I
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. J
WITH CONSULT
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for "TRANSMISSION" with CONSULT. K
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
L

M
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to TM-166. N
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH TCM
With CONSULT O
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “ACCELE POSI”. P
4. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. Refer to TM-157, "CON-
SULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC WITH ECM
P1705 TP SENSOR
With CONSULT
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT. Refer to EC-58, "CONSULT Func-
tion" (QR25DE) or EC-518, "CONSULT Function" (VQ40DE).
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to EC-58, "CONSULT Function" (QR25DE) or EC-518,
"CONSULT Function" (VQ40DE).
• If CAN communication line is detected, go to TM-166, "Diagnosis Procedure".
4.CHECK DTC
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation".

P1710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. B
C
Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.)
ATF TEMP SE 1 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) 3.3 - 2.7 - 0.9 V
TM

• Diagnostic trouble code “P1710 (A/T), P0710 (ENGINE)” with CONSULT or 10th judgment flicker without E
CONSULT is detected when:
- TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
- A/T fluid temperature does not rise to the specified temperature after driving for a certain period of time. F
- There is a certain temperature difference between A/T fluid and engine coolant. (Except for Mexico)
G
• A/T fluid temperature sensor H
CAUTION: I
NOTE:
J
WITH CONSULT K
Confirmation procedure 1
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. L
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
M
5. If DTC is not detected, go to “Confirmation procedure 2”.
N
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and cool the engine.
3. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. O
4. Record A/T fluid temperature.
5. If A/T fluid temperature is less than 20°C (68°F), go to “Confirmation procedure 3”.
6. If A/T fluid temperature is 20°C (68°F) or more, go to “Confirmation procedure 4”. (Except for Mexico) P
2. Start the engine and wait for at least 3 minutes.
3. Drive the vehicle for the total minuets specified in the Driving time column below with the following condi-
tions satisfied.

A/T fluid temperature before engine start Driving time

−40°C (−40°F) – −31°C (−23.8°F) 20 minutes or more
−30°C (−22°F) – −21°C (−5.8°F) 18 minutes or more
−20°C (−4°F) – −11°C (12.2°F) 14 minutes or more
−10°C (14°F) – −1°C (30.2°F) 11 minutes or more
0°C (32°F) – 9°C (48.2°F) 8 minutes or more
10°C (50°F) – 19°C (66.2°F) 5 minutes or more
5. If DTC is not detected, go to “Confirmation procedure 4”. (Except for Mexico)
1. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
2. Select “COOLANT TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
3. Check temperature difference between A/T fluid and engine coolant.
4. When the temperature is calculated by subtracting the engine coolant temperature from A/T fluid temper-
ature more than 47°C (116.6°F) or is it less than −19°C (−2.2°F), go to TM-198, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
• Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and cool the engine.
2. Start the engine and wait for at least 3 minutes.
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 20 minutes or more.
5. If DTC is not detected, go to “Confirmation procedure 3”. (Except for Mexico)
1. Complete engine diagnoses P0111 and P0116.
2. After starting the engine, run the engine at idle for 5 minutes.
1.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL

With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 1”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 1. Refer to TM-199, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK SUB-HARNESS

(A) terminals and TCM connector (B) terminals. A

Transmission range B
F505 6
switch connector Yes
Transmission range
C
F505 7
switch connector Yes
TCM connector F503 18 JSDIA1330ZZ
TM
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. E
1. Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-218, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation". G
5.CHECK DTC H
OK or NG I
NG >> GO TO 1.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000009480585
J
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation". K
2. Check resistance between transmission range switch connector
(A) terminals.
L
Temperature °C Resistance (Ap-
Name Terminal
(°F) prox.)
M
A/T fluid temperature
6-7 TM-387, "A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor"
sensor
3. If NG, replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288,
"Removal and Installation". N
JSDIA1331ZZ

P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication line. The sig-
nal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then
use the vehicle speed signal.
Item name Condition Display value (km/h)

VHCL/S SE-MTR During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.

• Diagnostic trouble code “P1721” with CONSULT is detected when TCM does not receive the proper vehicle
speed signal (input by CAN communication) from combination meter.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
ACCELE POSI: 1/8 or less

Is malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the result?
NO >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE-MTR”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METERS
Check combination meters. Refer to MWI-5, "METER SYSTEM : System Description".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. A
4.CHECK DTC
B
OK or NG
C
NG >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT TM
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. E
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F
OK or NG G
H

P1730 INTERLOCK
P1730 INTERLOCK
Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions.


when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor and switch.
• TCM monitors and compares gear position and conditions of each ATF pressure switch when gear is steady.
(The solenoid and switch circuit is open or shorted.)
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
3. Start engine.
WITH GST
Judgment of Interlock INFOID:0000000009480596
When interlock is judged to be malfunctioning, the vehicle should be fixed in 2GR, and should be set in a con-
dition in which it can travel.
When one of the following fastening patterns is detected, the fail-safe function in correspondence with the indi-
vidual pattern should be performed.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven in 2GR, a input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is not a
input speed sensor malfunction.
When interlock is detected at the 3GR or more, it is locked at the 2GR.
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.

P1730 INTERLOCK
4. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TM-162, "Diagnosis Procedure without CONSULT".
A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check low coast brake solenoid valve circuit and function. Refer to TM-214, TM-216. B
2.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. C
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END TM
NG >> GO TO 3.
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-218, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F
Check the following. G
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation". H

P1731 1ST ENGINE BRAKING
Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by engine brake other than at “1” position.

Low coast brake engaged. Refer to TM-133. ON
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to TM-133. OFF
ATF PRES SW 2

- When TCM monitors each ATF pressure switch and solenoid monitor value, and detects as irregular when
engine brake of 1GR acts other than at “1” position.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously preformed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
WITH CONSULT
3. Start engine.
ENGINE SPEED: 1,200 rpm
SLCT LVR POSI: “1” position
GEAR: 1st
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT
3. Drive vehicle in the “1” position (1GR), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON
OFF SOL”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. B
C
OK or NG
TM
4.CHECK DTC E
OK or NG F
NG >> GO TO 2.
G

P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID
Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the transmission range
switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then
be shifted to the optimum position.

Input clutch disengaged. Refer to TM-133. 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to TM-133. 0 - 0.05 A

CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
3. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
GEAR: 3rd ⇒ 4th (I/C ON/OFF)
5. If DTC is detected go to TM-206, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST

With CONSULT
4. Read out the value of “I/C SOLENOID” while driving.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. A
NG >> GO TO 2.
B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. C
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC F
OK or NG G
NG >> GO TO 2.
H

P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID
Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the transmission range

Front brake engaged. Refer to TM-133. 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to TM-133. 0 - 0.05 A

CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
3. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
GEAR: 3rd ⇒ 4th (FR/B ON/OFF)
5. If DTC is detected go to TM-208, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST

With CONSULT
3. Start engine.
4. Read out the value of “FR/B SOLENOID” while driving.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. A
NG >> GO TO 2.
B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. C
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC F
OK or NG G
NG >> GO TO 2.
H

P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID
Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the transmission range

Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to TM-133. 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to TM-133. 0 - 0.05 A

• Diagnostic trouble code “P1762” with CONSULT or 2nd judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
3. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
GEAR: 1st ⇒ 2nd (D/C ON/OFF)
WITH GST

With CONSULT
4. Read out the value of “D/C SOLENOID” while driving.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT A
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM C
OK or NG TM
4. CHECK DTC
E

• Refer to TM-210, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". F
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. G

P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the trans-
mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).
Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.

High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to TM-133. 0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to TM-133. 0 - 0.05 A

• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
3. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
GEAR: 2nd ⇒ 3rd (HLR/C ON/OFF)
WITH GST

With CONSULT
4. Read out the value of “HLR/C SOLENOID” while driving.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. A
NG >> GO TO 2.
B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. C
OK or NG
4.CHECK DTC F
OK or NG G
NG >> GO TO 2.
H

P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the trans-
mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).
Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.

ON OFF SOL

• Diagnostic trouble code “P1772” with CONSULT or 7th judgment flicker without CONSULT is detected when
TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
3. Start engine.
SLCT LVR POSI: “1” or “2”
GEAR: “1st” or “2nd” (LC/B ON/OFF)
WITH GST

With CONSULT
4. Read out the value of “ON OFF SOL” while driving.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. A
B
OK or NG
C
4.CHECK DTC TM
OK or NG E
NG >> GO TO 2.
F

• Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sen-
sor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunc-
tion such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.

ON OFF SOL
ATF PRES SW 2

- When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
- When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “1” or “2” position
GEAR: “1st” or “2nd” (LC/B ON/OFF)
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT. If DTC (P1774) is detected,
refer to TM-217, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If DTC (P1772) is detected, go to TM-214, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST

A
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT
B
3. Drive vehicle in the “1” or “2” position (“11” or “22” gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF
PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF SOL”. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. TM
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to TM-218, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
• The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. G
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H
4.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. I
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END J
NG >> GO TO 2.

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1

2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector termi-
nals and ground.
Item Connector Terminal Voltage

1 - Ground
Battery voltage
TCM F9 2 - Ground
6 - Ground 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. SCIA2104E
NG >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector termi-
nals and ground.
Item Connector Terminal Voltage

1 - Ground
TCM F9 2 - Ground Battery voltage
6 - Ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. SCIA2105E
NG >> GO TO 3.
• Harness for short or open between battery and A/T assembly harness connector terminals 1, 2
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and A/T assembly harness connector terminal 6
• 10A fuse (No. 22, located in the fuse and fusible link block) and 10A fuse (No. 49, located in the IPDM E/R)
• Ignition switch. Refer to PG-20, "Wiring Diagram—Ignition Power Supply".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector ter-
minals and ground. A

TCM F9 5, 10 - Ground Yes B
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
C
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. SCIA2106E
TM
• The A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)".
G
OK or NG
NG-1 >> Self-diagnosis does not activate: GO TO 7. H
NG-2 >> DTC is displayed: Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to TM-157, "CONSULT Function
(TRANSMISSION)".
7.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY I
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector ter- J
minals and TCM connector terminals.

K
A/T assembly harness connector F9 1
Yes
A/T assembly harness connector F9 2 L
Yes
Yes
SCIA5464E
M
4. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector ter- N

minals and TCM connector terminals.
Item Connector Terminal Continuity O

Yes
A/T assembly harness connector F9 10 P
Yes
5. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. SCIA5465E
OK or NG

CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIR-
CUIT
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION
CIRCUIT

Released accelerator pedal. ON
CLSD THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal. OFF

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “CLSD THL POS” and “W/O THL POS”.
OK or NG
NG >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Perform the self-diagnosis for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
• Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
• Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
B
Depressed brake pedal. ON
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal. OFF C
TM
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? E
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT F
With CONSULT
G
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “BRAKE SW”.
OK or NG
H
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH I
Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector termi-
nals 1 and 2.
J
Item Condition Terminal Continuity
Stop lamp When brake pedal is de-

Yes
switch harness pressed 1-2 K
connector When brake pedal is released No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to
BR-16, "Inspection and Adjustment". L
OK or NG SCIA2144E
OK >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.

• Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch. M
• Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch and combination meter.
NG >> Repair or replace the stop lamp switch.
N

Refer to TM-154, "System Description".

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to TM-240, "Wiring Diagram".
1.CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

Check key interlock cable for damage.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair key interlock cable. Refer to TM-297, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER
Check selector lever for damage. Refer to TM-285, "Inspection and Adjustment".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair selector lever. Refer to TM-284, "Exploded view".
2. Check voltage between A/T shift selector connector M156 termi-
nal 1 and ground.
Brake pedal depressed : Battery voltage

Brake pedal released : 0V
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
AWDIA0583ZZ
4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 3 and 4.
Brake pedal depressed : Continuity should exist

Brake pedal released : Continuity should not exist
YES >> GO TO 5.
AWDIA0419ZZ
5.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. A
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector M156 ter-
minal 2 and ground.
B
Continuity should exist.
YES >> GO TO 6. C
NO >> Repair harness or connectors.
AWDIA0584ZZ
6.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID TM
Check continuity between A/T shift selector terminals 1 and 2.

E
Selector lever in “P” position : Continuity should
exist
Except above : Continuity should F
not exist
YES >> Inspection End G
NO >> Replace A/T shift selector. Refer to TM-284, "Removal
and Installation". AWDIA0585ZZ

OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH

Releasing overdrive control switch OFF
OD CONT SW
Holding overdrive control switch ON

Is any malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Read out “OD CONT SW”.
Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly.
Monitor item Condition Display value

Releasing overdrive control switch OFF
OD CONT SW
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine)
2. Check voltage between A/T shift selector connector terminal
and ground.
Data
Item Connector Terminal Condition
(Approx.)
Releasing over- Battery
Overdrive drive control switch voltage
M156 7 - Ground
control switch Holding overdrive
0V
control switch
OK or NG JSDIA1481ZZ
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.

3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals.
A
Item Connector Terminal Condition Continuity
Releasing over-
No B
Overdrive drive control switch
M156 7-8
control switch Holding overdrive
Yes
control switch
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace overdrive control switch. JSDIA1482ZZ
TM
Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short or open between combination meter connector terminal 20 and A/T shift selector connec- E
tor terminal 7.
• Harness for short or open between A/T shift selector connector terminal 8 and ground.
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMBINATION METER G
Check the combination meter. Refer to MWI-5, "METER SYSTEM : System Description".
OK or NG
H

1ST POSITION SWITCH
1ST POSITION SWITCH

When setting selector lever to “1” position. ON
1 POSITION SW
When setting selector lever to other positions. OFF

Is any malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK 1ST POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Read out “1 POSITION SW”.
Check the signal of the 1st position switch is indicated properly.
Monitor item Condition Display value

1 POSITION SW
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine)
2. Check voltage between A/T shift selector connector terminal
and ground.
Data
Item Connector Terminal Condition
(Approx.)
When setting selec-
tor lever to “1” posi- 0V
1st position tion.
M156 9 - Ground
switch When setting selec-
Battery
tor lever to other po-
voltage
sitions. JSDIA1483ZZ
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK 1ST POSITION SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.

1ST POSITION SWITCH
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals.
A
Item Connector Terminal Condition Continuity
When setting se-
lector lever to “1” Yes B
1st position position.
M156 9 - 10
switch When setting se-
lector lever to other No C
positions.
OK or NG JSDIA1484ZZ
OK >> GO TO 4. TM
NG >> Repair or replace A/T shift selector assembly.
E
Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short or open between combination meter connector terminal 18 and A/T shift selector connec-
tor terminal 9.
• Harness for short or open between A/T shift selector connector terminal 10 and ground. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G
5.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check the combination meter. Refer to MWI-25, "Diagnosis Description". H
OK or NG
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I

TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [5AT: RE5R05A]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000009480651
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

• The CONSULT electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each sole-
noid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT display. If the difference is notice-
able, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts
using applicable diagnostic procedures.
• Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT and that indicated in Service Manual
may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
- Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
- Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
- Gear position displayed on CONSULT indicates the point where shifts are completed.
• Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F) 3.3 - 2.7 - 0.9 V
When perform slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 A
Selector lever in “N”,“P” positions. N/P
Selector lever in “R” position. R
Selector lever in “D” position. D
SLCT LVR POSI
Approximately matches the
VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving
speedometer reading.
Closely matches the tachometer
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
reading.
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A
Approximately matches the en-
INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON)
gine speed.
Approximately matches the
VHCL/S SE-MTR During driving
speedometer reading.
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to TM-133 ON
ATF PRES SW 2
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to TM-133 OFF
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to TM-133 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to TM-133 0 - 0.05 A
Front brake engaged. Refer to TM-133 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to TM-133 0 - 0.05 A
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to TM-133 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to TM-133 0 - 0.05 A
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to TM-133 0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to TM-133 0 - 0.05 A

TCM
A
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to TM-133 ON
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to TM-133 OFF
Selector lever in “N”,“P” positions. ON B
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other position. OFF
Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8 C
Released accelerator pedal. ON
CLSD THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
TM
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal. OFF
Releasing overdrive control switch OFF E
OD CONT SW
1 POSITION SW F
Depressed brake pedal. ON
BRAKESW
Released brake pedal. OFF G
TERMINAL LAYOUT
H
J
AWDIA0348ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES K
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
L
Power supply
1 R/B Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
Power supply
2 R/B Always Battery voltage M
(Memory back-up)
3 L CAN H — —
K-line (CONSULT N
4 V The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT. —
signal)
5 B Ground Always 0V
O
— Battery voltage
6 W/G Power supply

P
— 0V
Selector lever in “R” position. 0V

Back-up lamp re-
7 LG
lay Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage
8 P CAN L — —

TCM
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
Selector lever in “N”, “P” positions. Battery voltage
9 R Starter relay
Selector lever in other positions. 0V
10 B Ground Always 0V
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000009480652
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is an error in a
main electronic control input/output signal circuit. In fail-safe mode the transmission is fixed in 2GR, 4GR or
5GR (depending on the breakdown position), so the customer should feel “slipping” or “poor acceleration”.
Even when the electronic circuits are normal, under special conditions (for example, when slamming on the
brake with the wheels spinning drastically and stopping the tire rotation), the transmission can go into fail-safe
mode. If this happens, switch “OFF” the ignition switch for 10 seconds, then switch it “ON” again to return to
the normal shift pattern. Therefore, the customer's vehicle has returned to normal, so handle according to the
“diagnostics flow” (Refer to TM-129, "Diagnostic Work Sheet").
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to mark driving possible.
Output Speed Sensor
• Signals are input from two systems - from output speed sensor installed on the transmission and from com-
bination meter so normal driving is possible even if there is a malfunction in one of the systems. And if output
speed has unusual cases, 5GR is prohibited.
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
• If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according
to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow sys-
tems, the engine speed is fixed by ECM to a pre-determined engine speed to make driving possible.
Throttle Position Sensor
• If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according
to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow sys-
tems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by the idle signal sent from the ECM which is based on
input indicating either idle condition or off-idle condition (pre-determined accelerator opening) in order to
make driving possible.
Transmission Range Switch
• In the unlikely event that a malfunction signal enters the TCM, the position indicator is switched “OFF”, the
starter relay is switched “OFF” (starter starting is disabled), the back-up lamp relay switched “OFF” (back-up
lamp is OFF) and the position is fixed to the “D” range to make driving possible.
Starter Relay
• The starter relay is switched “OFF”. (Starter starting is disabled.)
Interlock
• If there is an interlock judgment malfunction, the transmission is fixed in 2GR to make driving possible.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, a input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is
not a input speed sensor malfunction.
• When interlock is detected at the 3GR or more, it is locked at the 2GR.
1st Engine Braking
• When there is an 1st engine brake judgment malfunction, the low coast brake solenoid is switched “OFF” to
avoid the engine brake operation.
Line Pressure Solenoid
• The solenoid is switched “OFF” and the line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure to make driv-
ing possible.
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
• The solenoid is switched “OFF” to release the lock-up.
Low Coast Brake Solenoid

TCM
• When a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs, in order to make driving possible, the engine brake is
not applied in 1GR and 2GR. A
Input Clutch Solenoid
• If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is
held in 4GR to make driving possible. B
Direct Clutch Solenoid
held in 4GR to make driving possible. C
Front Brake Solenoid
• If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid “ON”, in order to make driving possible, the
A/T is held in 5GR; if the solenoid is OFF, 4GR. TM
High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid

held in 4GR to make driving possible. E
Input Speed Sensor 1 or 2

• The control is the same as if there were no input speed sensors, 5GR is prohibited.
F
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000009480653
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority G
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U0100/U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U0100/
U1000. Refer to TM-165 (U0100), TM-166 (U1000). H
Priority Detected items (DTC)

• U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) I
1
• U1000 CANCOMM CIRCUIT
2 Except above
J
DTC No. Index INFOID:0000000009480654
NOTE: K
If DTC U0100/U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U0100/
U1000. Refer to TM-165 (U0100), TM-166 (U1000).
DTC L
OBD-II Except OBD-II Items
Reference page
(CONSULT screen terms)
CONSULT CONSULT only
GST (*1) “TRANSMISSION” M
— P0615 STARTER RELAY TM-167
P0700 P0700 TRANSMISSION CONT TM-169
N
P0705 P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A TM-170
P0710 P1710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-197
P0717 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-172 O
P0720 P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-174
— P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-177
P
P0731 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-189
P0740 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-189

TCM
DTC
OBD-II Except OBD-II Items
Reference page
(CONSULT screen terms)
CONSULT CONSULT only
GST (*1) “TRANSMISSION”
P0744 (*2) P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-191
P0745 P0745 PC SOLENOID A TM-193
— P1705 TP SENSOR TM-195
— P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL TM-200
P1730 P1730 INTERLOCK TM-202
— P1731 1ST E/BRAKING TM-204
P1752 P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOL TM-206
P1757 P1757 FR BRAKE SOLENOID TM-208
P1762 P1762 DRCT CLUTCH SOL TM-210
P1767 P1767 HLR CLUTCH SOLENOID TM-212
P1772 P1772 L C BRAKE SOLENOID TM-214
P1774 (*2) P1774 L C BRAKE SOLENOID TM-216
U0100 U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) TM-165
U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-166
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [5AT: RE5R05A]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000009480655
B
TM
ABDWA0730GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
ABDWA0731GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
ABDIA1246GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
ABDIA0997GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
ABDIA1247GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
ABDIA1248GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
ABDIA1249GB

Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000009480656
ABDWA0553GB

TM
ABDIA0411GB

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [5AT: RE5R05A]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Chart INFOID:0000000009480657
• The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
• Overhaul and inspect inside the A/T only if A/T fluid condition is NG. Refer to TM-269, "Checking the
A/T Fluid (ATF)".
Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
EC-121
(QR25DE),
1. Engine idle speed
EC-588
(VQ40DE)
2. Engine speed signal TM-177
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-195
4. Control cable adjustment TM-285
ON vehicle
Large shock. (“N”→“ 5. ATF temperature sensor TM-197
1
D” position)
6. Front brake solenoid valve TM-208
7. CAN communication line TM-166
8. Fluid level and state TM-269
9. Line pressure test TM-276
10. Control valve with TCM TM-288
11. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
OFF vehicle TM-313
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-132.)
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-210
Shift 4. CAN communication line TM-166
Shock
Shock is too large 5. Engine speed signal TM-177
ON vehicle
2 when changing D1→ 6. Input speed sensor TM-172
D2.
TM-174,
7. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal
TM-200
OFF vehicle 10. Direct clutch TM-360
3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-212
Shock is too large 5. Engine speed signal TM-177

ON vehicle
D3.
TM-174,
TM-200
OFF vehicle 10. High and low reverse clutch TM-358

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
B
3. Input clutch solenoid valve TM-206
Shock is too large 5. Engine speed signal TM-177 C

ON vehicle
D4.
TM-174,
TM-200 TM
E
OFF vehicle 10. Input clutch TM-348
2. Control cable adjustment TM-285 F
G
ON vehicle
Shock is too large
6. Input speed sensor TM-172
5 when changing D4→
Shift D5. TM-174, H
Shock TM-200
9. Control valve with TCM TM-288 I
10. Front brake (brake band) TM-313
OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch TM-348
J
3. CAN communication line TM-166 K
ON vehicle 5. Input speed sensor TM-172
Shock is too large for TM-174, L
downshift when accel- 6. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal
6 TM-200
erator pedal is
pressed. 7. Fluid level and state TM-269
M

10. Input clutch TM-348 N
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch TM-358
12. Direct clutch TM-360
O

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page
Shock is too large for TM-174,

7 upshift when accelera- TM-200
tor pedal is released. 7. Fluid level and state TM-269
OFF vehicle
Shift
Shock
Shock is too large for ON vehicle
8 TM-174,
lock-up. 6. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal
TM-200
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-189
OFF vehicle 10. Torque converter TM-313
ON vehicle 3. CAN communication line TM-166
Shock is too large dur-
9 5. Control valve with TCM TM-288
ing engine brake.
OFF vehicle

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
TM-174,
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal B
TM-200
ON vehicle 3. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-210

Gear does not change
10
from D1 → D2. 4. Line pressure test TM-276
C
OFF vehicle 7. Direct clutch TM-360 TM
TM-174,
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal E
TM-200
ON vehicle 3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-212

11 Gear does not change
from D2 → D3. 4. Line pressure test TM-276
F
OFF vehicle 7. High and low reverse clutch TM-358 G
No Up TM-174,
2. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal H
Shift TM-200
Gear does not change ON vehicle
12 4. Front brake solenoid valve TM-208
from D3 → D4. I
7. Control valve with TCM TM-288 J
K
TM-174,
TM-200
L
Gear does not change 5. Input speed sensor TM-172
13
from D4 → D5.
6. Line pressure test TM-276 M
N
OFF vehicle

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page
TM-174,
TM-200
ON vehicle
In “D” range, does not
14
downshift to 4GR. 5. CAN communication line TM-166
OFF vehicle
TM-174,
TM-200
In “D” or “3” range, ON vehicle
15 does not downshift to 4. Front brake solenoid valve TM-208
3GR. 5. CAN communication line TM-166
No Down
Shift
TM-174,
TM-200
In “D” or “2” range, ON vehicle 3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-212
16 does not downshift to
2GR.
TM-174,
TM-200
In “D” or “1” range, ON vehicle 3. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-210
17 does not downshift to
1GR.

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
TM-174,
TM-200

C
When “D” position, re- 7. 3rd one-way clutch TM-346 TM
18
mains in 1GR.
8. 1st one-way clutch TM-313
9. Gear system TM-313
E
10. Reverse brake TM-313
OFF vehicle
11. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-
possible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM- TM-313
Slips/Will 132.) F
Not en-
gage 12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
TM-313
G
TM-174,
TM-200
H
ON vehicle 3. Low coast brake solenoid valve TM-214
When “D” position, re- 5. CAN communication line TM-166 I

19
mains in 2GR. 6. Control valve with TCM TM-288
7. 3rd one-way clutch TM-346
J
10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible K
TM-313

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page
TM-174,
TM-200
ON vehicle
When “D” position, re-
20 mains in 3GR. 6. 3rd one-way clutch TM-346
OFF vehicle 9. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-
132.)
TM-313
Slips/Will 1. Fluid level and state TM-269
Not en-
gage TM-174,
TM-200

6. Low coast brake solenoid valve TM-214
When “D” position, re- 7. Front brake solenoid valve TM-208
21
mains in 4GR.
OFF vehicle

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
TM-174,
TM-200
ON vehicle 3. Front brake solenoid valve TM-208

C
When “D” position, re- 5. CAN communication line TM-166
22
mains in 5GR.
7. Front brake (brake band) TM-313 TM
OFF vehicle
E
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-195 F
ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test TM-276
G
6. Torque converter TM-313

Slips/Will
Not En- 7. Oil pump assembly TM-343 H
gage Vehicle cannot be
23 8. 3rd one-way clutch TM-346
started from D1.
10. Gear system TM-313 I
OFF vehicle
12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-
J
132.)
TM-313 K
L
24 Does not lock-up. 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-189 M
N
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly TM-343

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page
Does not hold lock-up
25 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-189
condition.
OFF vehicle
Lock-up is not re-
26 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-189
leased.
Slips/Will
Not en- 7. Control valve with TCM TM-288
gage 8. Torque converter TM-313
OFF vehicle
TM-174,
TM-200

No shock at all or the
clutch slips when vehi- 6. Control valve with TCM TM-288
27
cle changes speed D1 7. Torque converter TM-313
→ D2.
OFF vehicle 10. Gear system TM-313
TM-313

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
TM-174,
TM-200

C
7. Torque converter TM-313 TM
clutch slips when vehi-
28
cle changes speed D2 8. Oil pump assembly TM-343
→ D3.
E
12. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is F
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-313
TM-132.)
Slips/Will
Not en- 13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
TM-313 G
gage to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-132.)
TM-174, H
TM-200
ON vehicle
4. Front brake solenoid valve TM-208 I
29 J
cle changes speed D3 7. Control valve with TCM TM-288
→ D4.
9. Oil pump assembly TM-343 K
OFF vehicle
12. High and low reverse clutch TM-358 L

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page
TM-174,
TM-200
ON vehicle
30
cle changes speed D4 7. Control valve with TCM TM-288
→ D5.
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will 13. High and low reverse clutch TM-358
Not en-
gage 1. Fluid level and state TM-269
TM-174,
TM-200
ON vehicle
When you press the
accelerator pedal and 6. Line pressure test TM-276
31 shift speed D5→ D4,
the engine idles or the
transmission slips. 8. Torque converter TM-313
OFF vehicle

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
TM-174,
TM-200
ON vehicle
C
When you press the 7. Control valve with TCM TM-288 TM
accelerator pedal and
32 shift speed D4→ D3, 8. Torque converter TM-313
the engine idles or the 9. Oil pump assembly TM-343
transmission slips. E
OFF vehicle 12. High and low reverse clutch TM-358 F
13. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
TM-132.)
Slips/Will G
Not en- 14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
TM-313
gage to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-132.)
1. Fluid level and state TM-269 H
TM-174,
TM-200
3. High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-212 I
ON vehicle
When you press the J
33 shift speed D3→ D2, 7. Control valve with TCM TM-288
the engine idles or the
8. Torque converter TM-313 K
transmission slips.
OFF vehicle 11. Gear system TM-313 L
TM-313 M

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page
TM-174,
TM-200

When you press the 7. Torque converter TM-313
34 shift speed D2→ D1, 8. Oil pump assembly TM-343
the engine idles or the 9. 3rd one-way clutch TM-346
transmission slips.
OFF vehicle
TM-132.)
Slips/Will 14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible

TM-313
Not En- to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-132.)
gage 1. Fluid level and state TM-269
ON vehicle 4. CAN communication line TM-166
5. Transmission range switch TM-170
With selector lever in 8. Torque converter TM-313
35 “D” position, accelera-
tion is extremely poor. 9. Oil pump assembly TM-343
OFF vehicle 12. Reverse brake TM-313
TM-132.)
TM-313

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
B
ON vehicle
5. CAN communication line TM-166 C
With selector lever in
36 “R” position, accelera- 6. Transmission range switch TM-170
tion is extremely poor.
TM
OFF vehicle 10. Output shaft TM-313 E
2. Line pressure test TM-276 F
ON vehicle 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-195
G
While starting off by 7. Oil pump assembly TM-343 H
accelerating in 1GR,
37 Slips/Will 8. 3rd one-way clutch TM-346
engine races or slip-
Not En- page occurs. 9. 1st one-way clutch TM-313
gage I
OFF vehicle
12. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is J
TM-132.)
13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible K
TM-313
2. Line pressure test TM-276 L
ON vehicle
M
While accelerating in 6. Control valve with TCM TM-288

38 2GR, engine races or 7. Torque converter TM-313
slippage occurs. N
OFF vehicle 10. Gear system TM-313 O
TM-313 P

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page
ON vehicle
While accelerating in
39 3GR, engine races or 8. Oil pump assembly TM-343
slippage occurs.
Slips/Will TM-132.)
Not En-
gage TM-313
ON vehicle
40 4GR, engine races or
slippage occurs. 7. Torque converter TM-313
OFF vehicle

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
B
ON vehicle
5. Front brake solenoid valve TM-208 C
41 5GR, engine races or
slippage occurs. 7. Torque converter TM-313
TM
OFF vehicle
10. Input clutch TM-348 E
1. Fluid level and state TM-269 F
G
42 Slips at lock-up. 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-189
6. CAN communication line TM-166 H
Slips/Will
Not En- 8. Torque converter TM-313
gage OFF vehicle I
2. Line pressure test TM-276 J
ON vehicle K
7. Control cable adjustment TM-285 L
43 No creep at all. M
N
OFF vehicle
15. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is O
TM-132.)
16. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible P
TM-313

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page
ON vehicle 3. Transmission range switch TM-170
Vehicle cannot run in 4. Control cable adjustment TM-285

44
all positions. 5. Control valve with TCM TM-288
8. Output shaft TM-313
Slips/Will With selector lever in 7. Oil pump assembly TM-343
45 Not En- “D” position, driving is
gage not possible. 8. 1st one-way clutch TM-313
OFF vehicle 10. Reverse brake TM-313
TM-132.)
TM-313
With selector lever in 4. Control cable adjustment TM-285
46 “R” position, driving is
not possible. 5. Control valve with TCM TM-288
OFF vehicle 7. Output shaft TM-313
TM-174,
TM-200
Shift point is high in
47 Others ON vehicle
“D” position. 3. CAN communication line TM-166
4. ATF temperature sensor TM-197

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
TM-174,
TM-200
48
Shift point is low in “D”
ON vehicle 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-195 B
position.
C
3. Input speed sensor TM-172 TM
TM-174,
ON vehicle TM-200
Judder occurs during
49 E
lock-up. 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-195
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-189
F
1. Fluid level and state TM-269 G
ON vehicle
H
Strange noise in “R”
50 5. Torque converter TM-313
position.
Others
6. Oil pump assembly TM-343 I
J
2. Engine speed signal TM-177 K
ON vehicle
Strange noise in “N”
51 4. Control valve with TCM TM-288
position.
5. Torque converter TM-313 L
OFF vehicle 6. Oil pump assembly TM-343
M
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line TM-166 N
Strange noise in “D”
52 5. Torque converter TM-313
position.
O
8. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to P
TM-313
perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-132.)

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page
ON vehicle
4. 1st position switch TM-226
Vehicle does not de-
53 celerate by engine 5. CAN communication line TM-166
brake.
ON vehicle 3. Control cable adjustment TM-285
Others Engine brake does not 4. CAN communication line TM-166

54
operate in “2” position. 5. Control valve with TCM TM-288
ON vehicle
4. 1st position switch TM-226
Engine brake does not
55 5. CAN communication line TM-166
operate in “1” position.

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
B
ON vehicle
5. Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-210 C
TM
56 Maximum speed low.
10. Gear system TM-313 E
OFF vehicle
13. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is F
TM-132.)
14 Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to
TM-313
G
perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-132.)
Others
EC-121
(QR25DE), H
1. Engine idle speed
ON vehicle EC-588
57 Extremely large creep. (VQ40DE)
I
With selector lever in 1. Transmission range switch TM-170
“P” position, vehicle ON vehicle
2. Control cable adjustment TM-285 J
does not enter parking
58 condition or, with se-
lector lever in another
OFF vehicle 3. Parking pawl components TM-313
position, parking con- K
dition is not cancelled.
2. Fluid level and state TM-269 L
Vehicle runs with ON vehicle 3. Control cable adjustment TM-285
59 transmission in “P” po-
sition. 4. Control valve with TCM TM-288
M
5. Parking pawl components TM-313

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page
ON vehicle
Vehicle runs with 6. Gear system TM-313
60 transmission in “N” po-
sition. 7. Direct clutch TM-360
OFF vehicle
9. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is im-
132.)
TM-313
PG-20,
1. Ignition switch and starter
STR-12
Engine does not start
61 ON vehicle
in “N” or “P” position. 2. Control cable adjustment TM-285
PG-20,
Others 1. Ignition switch and starter
Engine starts in posi- STR-12
62 tions other than “N” or ON vehicle
“P”.
ON vehicle
63 Engine stall. 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-189
Engine stalls when se- ON vehicle
64 lect lever shifted “N”→ 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-189
“D”, “R”.

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Reference
page A
2.Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-210
B
ON vehicle
Engine speed does TM-174, C
65 5. Output speed sensor and vehicle speed signal
not return to idle. TM-200
Others 6. CAN communication line TM-166

7. Control valve with TCM TM-288 TM
OFF vehicle
E
O/D OFF indicator
66 lamp does not come ON vehicle 2. Combination meter MWI-25
on.
3. TCM power supply TM-218 F

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [5AT: RE5R05A]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
ual.
WARNING:
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
- Oily dirt:
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of A/T and Engine INFOID:0000000009480660
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.

PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair A
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. Will
cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
B
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. May cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. C
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A mis-connected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and TM
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution INFOID:0000000009480661
E
• Before connecting or disconnecting the A/T assembly har-
ness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect
negative battery cable. Because battery voltage is applied to
TCM even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”. F
H
SEF289H
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC I

(Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed in
the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
J
SEF217U L
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-16, "FOR USA AND CANADA : Fluids and Lubricants"
(United States and Canada) and MA-18, "FOR MEXICO : Fluids and Lubricants" (Mexico). M
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• After replacing the ATF, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to pre-
vent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. N
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission. O
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled. P
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.

PRECAUTIONS
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
• Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to TM-
272, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning".
• After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.
• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque con-
verter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer to
TM-271, "Changing the A/T Fluid (ATF)", TM-269, "Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF)".
ATF COOLER SERVICE

If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to TM-272, "A/
T Fluid Cooler Cleaning". For radiator replacement, refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE),
CO-44, "Removal and Installation" (VQ40DE).
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
• A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. Refer to the table on TM-157,
"CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
• The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memo-
ries.
Always perform the procedure on TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)" to complete the
repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
For details of OBD-II, refer to TM-155, "Introduction".
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-74, "Description".

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [5AT: RE5R05A]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure
(J-34301-C) TM
Oil pressure gauge set
1 ST25051001
( — )
Oil pressure gauge E
2 ST25052000
( — )
Hose
3 ST25053000 F
( — )
Joint pipe
4 ST25054000 LCIA0399E G
( — )
Adapter
5 ST25055000
( — ) H
Adapter
KV31103600 Measuring line pressure
(J-45674)
Joint pipe adapter
I
(With ST25054000)
ZZA1227D
ST33400001 • Installing rear oil seal (2WD models) K

(J-26082) • Installing oil pump housing oil seal
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
L
NT086 M
KV31102400 Installing reverse brake return spring retainer
(J-34285 and J-34285-87) a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
Clutch spring compressor b: 174 mm (6.85 in) N
O
NT423
ST25850000 Remove oil pump assembly

(J-25721-A) a: 179 mm (7.05 in) P
Sliding hammer b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in)
d: M12X1.75P
NT422

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [5AT: RE5R05A]
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
— Assist in removal of transmission and transfer
(J-47002) case as one assembly using only one trans-
Transmission jack adapter kit mission jack.
1. —
(J-47002-1)
Center bracket
2. —
(J-47002-3)
Adapter plate
3. — WCIA0499E
(J-47002-4)
Adapter block
— Removing and installing trim parts
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts
PIIB1407E
Drift Installing manual shaft seals

a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
NT083
Drift Installing rear oil seal (4WD models)

a: 64 mm (2.52 in) dia.
SCIA5338E
Pin punch • Removing retaining pin

• Installing retaining pin
a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
NT410

A/T FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [5AT: RE5R05A]
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
A/T FLUID
Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF) INFOID:0000000009480665
B
CAUTION:
If using the vehicle for towing, the A/T fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to MA-10, "FOR USA
AND CANADA : Periodic Maintenance" (United States and Canada) and MA-13, "FOR MEXICO : Peri- C
odic Maintenance" (Mexico).
1. Before driving, the A/T fluid level can be checked at A/T fluid
temperatures of 30° to 50° C (86° to 122° F) using the “COLD” TM
range on the A/T fluid level gauge as follows:
a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake.
b. Start the engine and move the selector lever through each gear E
position. Shift the selector lever into the “P” position.
c. Check the A/T fluid level with the engine idling.
d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint- F
free paper.
CAUTION: LLIA0071E
When wiping the A/T fluid from the A/T fluid level gauge, G
always use a lint-free paper, not a cloth.
e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging
pipe until the cap contacts the top of the A/T fluid charging pipe H
as shown.
CAUTION:
To check A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until I
the cap contacts the top of the A/T fluid charging pipe, with
the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position.
f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the A/T fluid level. If J
the A/T fluid level is at low side of range, add A/T fluid to the
transmission through the A/T fluid charging pipe.
CAUTION: SCIA2899E
Do not overfill the transmission with A/T fluid. K
g. Install the A/T fluid level gauge and the A/T fluid level gauge bolt.
A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to TM-304, "Component". L
2. Warm up the engine and transmission.

3. Check for any A/T fluid leaks. M
4. Drive the vehicle to increase the A/T fluid temperature to 80° C (176° F).

A/T FLUID
5. Allow the A/T fluid temperature to fall to approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT to monitor the A/
T fluid temperature as follows:
SLIA0016E
NOTE:
The A/T fluid level will be significantly affected by the A/T fluid temperature as shown. Therefore monitor
the A/T fluid temperature data using the CONSULT.
a. Connect CONSULT to data link connector.
b. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
c. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP 1”.
6. Re-check the A/T fluid level at A/T fluid temperatures of approxi-

mately 65°C (149°F) using the “HOT” range on the A/T fluid
level gauge as shown. The HOT range is between 50° - 80° C
(122° - 176° F).
CAUTION:
• When wiping the A/T fluid from the A/T fluid level gauge,
always use lint-free paper, not a cloth.
LLIA0071E
• To check the A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level
gauge until the cap contacts the top of the A/T fluid charg-
ing pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal
inserted position as shown.
7. Check the A/T fluid condition.
• If the A/T fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there
may be an internal problem with the transmission. Flush the
transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission.
• If the A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands,
etc.), replace the radiator and flush the transmission cooler
lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing SCIA2899E
the transmission.
8. Install the A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe.
9. Tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification.
A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to TM-304, "Component".

A/T FLUID
Changing the A/T Fluid (ATF) INFOID:0000000009480666
A
CAUTION:
If using the vehicle for towing, the A/T fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to MA-10, "FOR USA
AND CANADA : Periodic Maintenance" (United States) or MA-13, "FOR MEXICO : Periodic Mainte- B
nance"(Mexico).
1. Drive the vehicle to warm up the A/T fluid to approximately 80° C (176° F).
2. Stop the engine. C
3. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge.
4. Drain the A/T fluid from the drain plug hole, then install the drain
plug with a new gasket. Refill the transmission with new A/T TM
fluid. Always refill with the same volume as the drained A/T fluid.
Use the A/T fluid level gauge to check the A/T fluid level as
shown. Add A/T fluid as necessary.
E
Drain plug : Refer to TM-304, "Component".
LLIA0071E
G
• To flush out the old A/T fluid from the transmission oil coolers, pour new A/T fluid into the A/T fluid charg-
ing pipe with the engine idling and at the same time drain the old A/T fluid from the auxiliary transmis-
sion oil cooler hose return line.
H
• When the color of the A/T fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is
about the same as the color of the new A/T fluid, flushing out the old A/T fluid is complete. The amount
of new A/T fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% increase of the specified capacity.
I
A/T fluid grade and capacity : Refer to MA-16, "FOR USA AND CANADA : Fluids and Lubri-
cants" (United States and Canada) and MA-18, "FOR MEXICO
: Fluids and Lubricants" (Mexico). J
CAUTION:
• If genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used.
Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will K
cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the
automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty
• When filling the transmission with A/T fluid, do not spill the A/T fluid on any heat generating
L
parts such as the exhaust manifold.
• Do not reuse the drain plug gasket.
5. Install the A/T fluid level gauge and tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification.
M
6. Drive the vehicle to warm up the A/T fluid to approximately 80° C (176° F). N
7. Check the fluid level and condition. If the A/T fluid is still dirty,
repeat steps 2 through 6.
O
LLIA0071E
8. Install the A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe and install the A/T fluid level gauge bolt.
9. Tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification.
A/T FLUID
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning INFOID:0000000009480667
Whenever an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be
inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can con-
taminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case,
malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE
1. Position a drain pan under the A/T inlet and outlet fluid cooler tube to cooler hose connection.
2. Put a different color matching mark on each cooler tube to cooler hose connection to aid in assembly.
CAUTION:
Use paint to make the matching mark. Do not damage the tubes or hose.
3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the
steel cooler tubes.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting.
4. Drain any A/T fluid from the cooler hose.
SCIA3830E
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission

Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION:
• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
• Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
• Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis-
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet SCIA3831E
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
8. Wrap a shop rag around the tip of the air gun and the cooler out-
let hose.
SCIA3832E
9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds
to force out any remaining fluid.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler tubes to the A/T.

A/T FLUID
12. Remove the banjo bolts.
13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the A/T by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner A
in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side
back toward the A/T for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. B
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
C
17. Perform "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE".
A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE: TM
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
1. Position a drain pan under the A/T inlet and outlet fluid cooler tube to cooler hose connection.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose. E
3. Put a different color matching mark on each cooler tube to cooler hose connection to aid in assembly.
CAUTION:
Use paint to make the matching mark. Do not damage the tubes or hose. F
4. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the
steel cooler tubes.
NOTE:
G
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting.
I
SCIA3830E
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission J

Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION:
K
• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
• Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin. L
• Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis-
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet SCIA3831E M
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
7. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose. N
SCIA3833E

A/T FLUID
8. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
9. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
10. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid
into the coffee filter.
11. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
12. Perform A/T fluid cooler inspection. Refer to TM-269, "Checking
the A/T Fluid (ATF)".
SCIA3834E
A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
a. If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and
the procedure is ended.
SCIA2967E
b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in
the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T fluid
cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection procedure is
ended. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation" for
(QR25DE) CO-44, "Removal and Installation" for (VQ40DE).
SCIA5659E
A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION

After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.

INSPECTIONS BEFORE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Fluid Condition Check INFOID:0000000009480668
A/T FLUID CHECK B

Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check
• Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to TM-271, "Changing the A/T Fluid (ATF)".
C
Fluid Condition Check
Inspect the fluid condition.
TM
Fluid condition Conceivable Cause Required Operation
Replace the ATF and check the A/T
Varnished (viscous Clutch, brake main unit and the vehicle for mal-
E
varnish state) scorched functions (wire harnesses, cooler
pipes, etc.)
Milky white or Replace the ATF and check for plac-
Water in the fluid F
cloudy es where water is getting in.
Large amount of Unusual wear of
Replace the ATF and check for im-
metal powder mixed sliding parts within
proper operation of the A/T.
in A/T SAT638A
G
Stall Test INFOID:0000000009480669
H
STALL TEST
Stall Test Procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary. I
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary. J
SAT647B
M
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
P
SCIA7463E

4. Engine start, apply foot brake, and place shift selector in “D”
position.
5. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 sec-
onds during this test.
Stall speed: TM-387, "Stall Speed" SAT514G
7. Move the shift selector to the “N” position.

8. Cool down the ATF.
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least one minute.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position.
Judgment of Stall Test
Shift selector position

Expected problem location
D R
• Forward brake
• Forward one-way clutch
H O
• 1st one-way clutch
• 3rd one-way clutch
Stall rotation
O H • Reverse brake
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H • Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
Stall test standard value position
Does not shift-up D position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR, 5GR High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR, 5GR Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR Front brake slippage
Line Pressure Test INFOID:0000000009480670
LINE PRESSURE TEST

Line Pressure Test Port
SCIA2187E
Line Pressure Test Procedure

1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.

2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the ATF reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F), then inspect the amount of ATF and replenish if necessary. A
NOTE:
The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of
driving.
B
3. After warming up remove the oil pressure detection plug and
install the oil pressure gauge [ST2505S001(J-34301-C)].
CAUTION:
When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the O- C
ring attached to the oil pressure detection plug.
TM
E
SCIA5309E
4. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. F
SCIA7463E I
5. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and
the stall speed. J
CAUTION:
• Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement.
• When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed, refer K
to "STALL TEST".
6. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure
detection plug and tighten to the regulation torque below. L
Oil pressure detection :7.3 N·m (0.74 kg-m, 65 in-lb) SAT493G
plug M
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the O-ring.
• Apply ATF to O-ring. N
Line Pressure
Line pressure [kPa (kg/cm2, psi)] O

Engine speed
“R” position “D” position
At idle speed
TM-387, "Line Pressure" P
At stall speed
Judgment of Line Pressure Test

Judgment Possible cause

Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.
For example
Low for all positions • Oil pump wear
(P, R, N, D) • Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue
• Oil strainer ⇒ oil pump ⇒ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak
• Engine idle speed too low
Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
Idle speed cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment func-
tion.
For example
High • Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
• ATF temperature sensor malfunction
• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in “OFF” state, filter clog, cut line)
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment function.
For example
Oil pressure does
• Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
not rise higher than
• TCM breakdown
the oil pressure for
• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in“ ON” state)
idle.
• Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the pres-
Stall speed
sure adjustment function.
The pressure rises,
For example
but does not enter
• Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
the standard posi-
• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
tion.
• Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.

ROAD TEST
ROAD TEST
A
ROAD TEST B
• The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes.
• The road test is carried out in the following three stages.
C
1. Check before engine is started. Refer to TM-279.
2. Check at idle. Refer to TM-279.
TM
3. Cruise test
• Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to TM-280, TM-282, TM-282.
• Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items.
• Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are com- E
plete.
Check Before Engine Is Started INFOID:0000000009480672
F
1.CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
1. Park vehicle on level surface. G
2. Move shift selector to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
H
Does O/D OFF indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?
YES >> 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Perform self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the TM-129, "Diagnostic Work Sheet".
I
Refer to TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)", TM-162, "Diagnosis Procedure
without CONSULT".
3. Go to TM-279, "Check at Idle".
NO >> Stop the test and go to TM-242, "Symptom Chart". J
Check at Idle INFOID:0000000009480673
1.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE K
1. Park vehicle on level surface.

2. Move shift selector to “P” or “N” position. L
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Does the engine start?
M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Stop the road test and go to TM-242, "Symptom Chart".
2.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE N
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
2. Move shift selector in “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or “R” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position. O
Does the engine start in either position?
YES >> Stop the road test and go to TM-242, "Symptom Chart".
NO >> GO TO 3. P
3.CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS
2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Push the vehicle forward or backward.
5. Engage the parking brake.

ROAD TEST
When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move?
YES >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS
2. Move shift selector to “N” position.
3. Release the parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SHIFT SHOCK
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move shift selector to “D” position.
When the transmission is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock?
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move shift selector to “R” position.
3. Release the brake for 4 to 5 seconds.
Does the vehicle creep backward?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 7.
7.CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS
Inspect whether the vehicle creep forward when the transmission is put into the “D” position.
Does the vehicle creep forward in the “D” positions?
YES >> Go to TM-280, "Cruise Test - Part 1".
NO >> Record the malfunction and go to TM-280, "Cruise Test - Part 1".
Cruise Test - Part 1 INFOID:0000000009480674
1.CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1

1. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and ATF.
Appropriate temperature for the ATF: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
5. Set overdrive control switch to ON position (without manual mode).
6. Move shift selector to “D” position.
7. Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle.
With CONSULT
Read off the gear positions.
Starts from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Record the malfunction,GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropri-
ate speed.
• Refer to TM-385, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs".
With CONSULT
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?

ROAD TEST
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Record the malfunction,GO TO 3. A
B
ate speed.
With CONSULT
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. C
YES >> GO TO 4.
TM
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropri- E
ate speed.
With CONSULT F
YES >> GO TO 5. G
H
ate speed.
With CONSULT I
J
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK LOCK-UP K
When releasing accelerator pedal from D5 (closed throttle position signal: OFF), check lock-up from D5 to L/U.
With CONSULT L
Select “TCC SOLENOID” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
Does it lock-up?
YES >> GO TO 7. M
7.CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD
N
Check hold lock-up.
With CONSULT
O
Does it maintain lock-up status?
YES >> GO TO 8.
P
8.CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE
Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.
With CONSULT
Does lock-up cancel?
YES >> GO TO 9.

ROAD TEST
9.CHECK SHIFT-DOWN D5 → D4
Decelerate by pressing lightly on the brake pedal.
With CONSULT
Read the gear position and engine speed.
When the A/T shift-down D5 → D4, does the engine speed drop smoothly back to idle?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to TM-282, "Cruise Test - Part 2".
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transmission shifts up (D1 → D2)
at the correct speed.
With CONSULT
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Record the malfunction,GO TO 2.
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transmission shifts up (D2 → D3)
at the correct speed.
With CONSULT
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
YES >> GO TO 3.
When the transmission changes speed D3 → D4, return the accelerator pedal.
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake?
2. Go to TM-282, "Cruise Test - Part 3".
1.CHECK SHIFT-DOWN
1. Confirm overdrive control switch is ON position.
2. Confirm gear shift selector is in “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D5.
4. Release accelerator pedal.
5. Set overdrive control switch to OFF position while driving in D5.
With CONSULT
Read the gear position.
Does A/T shift from D5 to D4 (O/D OFF)?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SHIFT-DOWN
During D4 driving, move gear selector from D → 3 → 2 → 1.

ROAD TEST
With CONSULT
Read the gear position. A
Is downshifting correctly performed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Record the malfunction, GO TO 3. B
3.CHECK ENGINE BRAKE

Check engine brake. C
Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in 11 position?
2. Carry out the self-diagnostics. Refer to TM-157, "CONSULT Function (TRANSMISSION)". TM
NO >> Record the malfunction, then continue the trouble diagnosis.

SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [5AT: RE5R05A]

Exploded view INFOID:0000000009480677
WCIA0503E
1. Shift selector handle button 2. Shift selector handle spring 3. Shift selector handle
4. Overdrive control switch 5. Position indicator 6. Position lamp
7. Shift selector harness connector 8. Shift selector control cable 9. Lock plate
10. Key interlock cable 11. Shift selector assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-29, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect the following from the shift selector assembly.
• Shift selector control cable
• Key interlock cable
• Shift selector harness connector
4. Remove the shift selector assembly.

5. Remove the shift selector handle, if necessary.
6. Remove the position indicator, if necessary. A
INSTALLATION
• Install and adjust the shift selector control cable. Refer to TM-285, "Inspection and Adjustment". B
• Install and adjust the key interlock cable. Refer to TM-297, "Removal and Installation".
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000009480679
C
ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen nut of shift selector control cable (A). TM
2. Place the manual lever (B) and shift selector handle in “P” posi-
tion.
3. Push the shift selector control cable in the direction shown with a E
force of 9.8 N (1kg, 2.2 lb), and release it. This is in the natural
state, tighten shift selector control cable nut (A) to specifications.
F
Shift selector control : 14.7 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
cable nut (A)
AWDIA0755ZZ G
INSPECTION
With the shift selector handle in the “P” position, turn the ignition switch to the ON position with the engine
OFF. H
Confirm that the following conditions apply.
• The shift selector handle can be moved from the “P” position only when the brake pedal is depressed.
• The shift selector handle stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the I
positions.
• There is no excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
• The actual position of the shift selector handle matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and
the A/T body. J
• The back-up lamps illuminate only when the shift selector handle is placed in the “R” position.
• The back-up lamps do not illuminate when the shift selector handle is pushed against the “R” position when
in the “P” or “N” position. K
• The engine can only be started with the shift selector handle in the “P” and “N” positions.
• The A/T is locked completely when shift selector handle is in the “P” position.
L

OIL PAN
OIL PAN

Removal
1. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to TM-271, "Changing the A/T Fluid
(ATF)".
2. Remove oil pan bolts.
3. Remove oil pan and gasket.
SCIA2308E
4. Check for foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark,
has some burned smell, or contains foreign particles then friction material (clutches, band) may need
replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves,
servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
CAUTION:
If friction material is detected, flush the transmission cooler after repair. Refer to TM-272, "A/T
Fluid Cooler Cleaning".
5. Remove magnets from oil pan.
SCIA5200E
Installation
1. Install the oil pan magnets as shown.
SCIA5200E

OIL PAN
2. Install the oil pan with new oil pan gasket.
CAUTION: A
• Be sure the oil drain plug is located to the rear of the
transmission assembly.
• Before installing oil pan bolts, remove any traces of old
B
sealant from the sealing surfaces and threaded holes.
• Do not reuse old gasket, replace with a new one.
• Always replace the oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing.
• Partially install the oil pan bolts in a criss-cross pattern to C
prevent dislocation of the gasket.
SCIA2308E
TM
3. Tighten oil pan bolts in numerical order as shown.
Oil pan bolts : 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb) E
G
SCIA4113E
4. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leaks. Refer to TM-269, "Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF)". H

CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
COMPONENTS
AWDIA0890GB
1. Transmission 2. Snap ring 3. Sub-harness

4. Control valve with TCM 5. Bracket 6. O-ring
7. Plug 8. Oil pan gasket 9. Oil pan bolts
10. Oil pan 11. Magnet 12. Drain plug
13. Drain plug gasket 14. Terminal cord assembly 15. O-ring
A. Refer to GI-4, "Component"
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM

Removal
1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-83, "Removal and Installation".
2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to TM-271, "Changing the A/T Fluid (ATF)".

4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
A
SCIA5021E
TM
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
Do not damage harness connector.
E
G
SCIA5022E
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to TM-286, "Removal and Installation".
H
7. Straighten terminal clip ( ) to free the output speed sensor har-
ness.
8. Disconnect output speed sensor harness connector (1). I
CAUTION:
J
K
JSDIA1316ZZ
9. Remove bolts (A), (B) and (C) from control valve with TCM.
L
: Front
M
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6 N
C 40 (1.57) 1
SCIA8074E
O

10. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
SCIA5142E
11. Remove plug (1) with bracket (2) from control valve with TCM.
• :Bolt
JSDIA1311ZZ
12. Remove the bracket (1) from plug (2).
JSDIA1312ZZ
13. Remove O-ring (1) from plug (2).

CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
JSDIA1313ZZ

14. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: A
SCIA5155E
TM
15. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION:
Do not damage harness connectors.
E
G
SCIA5447E
16. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve

H
with TCM using suitable tool.
SCIA5448E
K
17. Disconnect harness connector (1) and (2) from TCM connector
and transmission range switch.
CAUTION: L
Do not damage harness connectors.
N
JSDIA1317ZZ
Installation O
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to TM-269, "Checking the A/
T Fluid (ATF)".
P

1. Connect TCM connector (1) and transmission range switch har-
ness connector (2).
JSDIA1317ZZ
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with

TCM.
SCIA5450E
3. Connect TCM connector.
SCIA5447E
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Apply ATF to O-ring.
SCIA5155E
5. Install new O-ring (1) in plug (2).

CAUTION:
• O-ring should be free of contamination.
JSDIA1313ZZ

6. Install plug (2) to bracket (1).
A
JSDIA1312ZZ
TM
7. Install plug (1) [with bracket (2)] to control valve with TCM.
Tighten plug bolt ( ) to the specified torque.
CAUTION: E
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with
TCM.
F
G
JSDIA1311ZZ
8. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. H
(1) : Brake band

CAUTION: I
• Make sure that input speed sensor is securely installed
into input speed sensor hole (A).
• Hang down output speed sensor harness toward outside
so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. J
• Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve
with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.
JSDIA1318ZZ K
• Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with

manual plate projection. L
SCIA5142E
O
9. Install bolts (A), (B) and (C) in control valve with TCM.
: Front
P

A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1
SCIA8074E

10. Tighten bolt (1A), (2B) and (3A) temporarily to prevent disloca-
tion. After that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3). Then tighten
other bolts. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified
torque.
: Front
Bolt symbol A B C
Number of bolts 5 6 1
SCIA8075E
Length mm (in) 42 (1.65) 55 (2.17) 40 (1.57)
Tightening torque With ATF applied

7.9 (0.81, 70)
N·m (kg-m, in-lb) 7.9 (0.81, 70)
11. Connect output speed sensor harness connector (1).
JSDIA1319ZZ
12. Securely fasten output speed sensor (1) harness with terminal
clip ( ).
JSDIA1316ZZ
13. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to TM-286, "Removal and Installation".
14. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
SCIA5038E

15. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. A
17. Connect the negative battery terminal.
18. Refill the A/T with fluid and check the fluid level and for fluid
leakage. Refer to TM-269, "Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF)". B
SCIA5039E
TM

REAR OIL SEAL
REAR OIL SEAL
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-143, "Removal and Installation" (2S1330), DLN-152, "Removal
and Installation" (3S1310), DLN-163, "Removal and Installation" (3S1330), DLN-174, "Removal and
Installation" (3S1330-2BJ100).
2. Remove transfer from transmission (4WD models). Refer to DLN-101, "Removal and Installation"
(TX15B).
3. Remove rear oil seal using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch rear extension assembly (2WD models) or
adapter case assembly (4WD models).
SCIA5254E
INSTALLATION
1. Install new rear oil seal until it is flush into the rear extension
case (2WD models) using Tool or adapter case (4WD models)
Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082)

CAUTION:
• Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
2. Install transfer to transmission (4WD models). Refer to DLN-
101, "Removal and Installation" (TX15B).
3. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-143, "Removal and
Installation" (2S1330), DLN-152, "Removal and Installation"
(3S1310), DLN-163, "Removal and Installation" (3S1330), DLN-
174, "Removal and Installation" (3S1330-2BJ100).
4. Check the A/T fluid level and for fluid leaks. Refer to TM-269,
"Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF)".
WCIA0475E

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
A
Component INFOID:0000000009480683
TM
L
WCIA0467E
CAUTION:
• Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interfer- M
ence with adjacent parts.
• After installing key interlock cable to shift selector, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly
secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39 N (4.0
kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one. N
O
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/T finisher. Refer to IP-29, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the lower glove box. Refer to IP-23, "Removal and Installation". P
3. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-18, "Removal and Installation".

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
4. Unlock slider from adjuster holder by squeezing lock tabs.
5. Remove casing cap from bracket of shift selector assembly and
remove interlock rod from adjuster holder.
SCIA1230E
6. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock

cable.
LCIA0375E
INSTALLATION
1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder.
2. Set shift selector handle to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition key to "LOCK" position.
SCIA2258E

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
4. Insert key interlock rod (A) into adjuster holder (B).
A
5. Install casing cap (C) to bracket (D).
6. Move slider (E) toward key interlock rod (A) to secure adjuster
holder (B) to key interlock rod (A).
B
JSDIA0698ZZ
TM
7. Install instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
8. Install lower glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
9. Install A/T finisher. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View". E

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Removal and Installation for QR25DE Engine INFOID:0000000009480685
COMPONENTS
LCIA0395E
REMOVAL
1. Release air breather hose from clip.
2. Disconnect air breather hose from transmission tube.
3. Disconnect air breather hose from air breather tube.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Install air breather hose with paint mark at upper side.
• When installing the air breather hose, do not crush or block by folding or bending the hose.
• When inserting the hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube bend portion.
• Make sure clip is securely installed to bracket.
Removal and Installation for VQ40DE Engine INFOID:0000000009480686
COMPONENTS (2WD MODELS)

AIR BREATHER HOSE
TM
H
LCIA0389E
REMOVAL (2WD MODELS)

1. Release air breather hose from clip. I
J
INSTALLATION (2WD MODELS)
CAUTION:
• Install air breather hose with paint mark at upper side. K
tube bend portion. L
COMPONENTS (4WD)
M

AIR BREATHER HOSE
LCIA0390E
REMOVAL (4WD MODELS)

1. Release air breather hose from clip.
INSTALLATION (4WD MODELS)
CAUTION:
• Install air breather hose with paint mark at upper side.
tube bend portion.

A/T FLUID COOLER
A/T FLUID COOLER
A
TM
G
AWDIA0631GB
1. A/T fluid cooler 2. Fluid cooler tube 3. Clip

4. Hose clamp 5. Cooler hose (lower) 6. Cooler hose
H
7. Tube joint 8. Cooler hose (upper) A. To transmission
B. From radiator
I
NOTE:
ing.
J
REMOVAL
1. Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-23, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove A/T fluid cooler hoses from fluid cooler. K
3. Remove A/T fluid cooler.
INSTALLATION L
• After completing installation, check fluid level and check for fluid leaks. Refer to TM-269, "Checking the A/T
Fluid (ATF)".
M

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [5AT: RE5R05A]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Component INFOID:0000000009480688
QR25DE
AWDIA0691GB
1. Insulator 2. A/T cross member 3. A/T fluid cooler tube

4. A/T fluid cooler tube bracket 5. Copper sealing washers 6. Transmission assembly
7. A/T fluid indicator 8. O-ring 9. A/T fluid indicator pipe
10. Self-sealing bolt A. Refer to installation

VQ40DE 2WD Models
A
TM
I
AWDIA0622GB
1. A/T fluid indicator 2. A/T fluid indicator pipe 3. O-ring

J
4. Insulator 5. A/T crossmember 6. Copper sealing washers
7. Bracket 8. A/T fluid cooler tube 9. Front crossmember
10. Transmission assembly A. Self-sealing bolt B. Refer to installation.
K

VQ40DE 4WD Models
WCIA0574E
1. A/T fluid indicator 2. Insulator 3. A/T crossmember

4. Copper sealing washers 5. A/T fluid cooler tube 6. Bracket
7. Front crossmember 8. Transmission assembly 9. O-ring
10. A/T fluid indicator pipe A. Self-sealing bolt B. Refer to installation.
Removal and Installation for QR25DE INFOID:0000000009480689
CAUTION:
• Before replacing transmission assembly, perform additional service when replacing transmission
assembly. Refer to TM-131, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
: Special Repair Requirement".
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-83, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the A/T fluid indicator.
3. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly (LH). Refer to WT-48, "Adjustment".
4. Remove the front mudguard (LH). Refer to EXT-29, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove the front fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Fender Pro-
tector".
6. Remove the under cover using power tool.
8. Remove the starter.
9. Remove the rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-152, "Removal and Installation".
10. Remove the shift selector control cable and bracket from the A/T.

11. Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler tubes from the A/T assembly.
CAUTION: A
Do not reuse copper sealing washers.
12. Remove the dust cover from the converter housing.
13. Turn the crankshaft to access and remove the four bolts for the B
drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed
C
from the front of the engine.
14. Support the A/T assembly using a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow TM
it to collide against the drain plug.
E
16. Remove the crossmember using power tool. LCIA0335E
WARNING:
17. Tilt the transmission slightly to gain clearance between the body and the transmission, then disconnect F
the air breather hose.
18. Disconnect the A/T assembly harness connector.
G
20. Remove the A/T fluid indicator pipe.
21. Remove the A/T assembly to engine bolts using power tool. H
22. Remove A/T assembly from the vehicle using Tool.

I
CAUTION:
• Secure the torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure the A/T assembly to a transmission jack. J
NOTE:
The actual special service Tool may differ from Tool shown.
K
SCIA0499E
INSPECTION
L
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
• After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to
check dimension (A) to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
M
Dimension (A) : 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more
SAT017B
INSTALLATION P
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the
following.

• When installing the transmission to the engine, install the bolts in
accordance with the standard below.
Bolt No. 1 2 3
Quantity 4 1 6
Bolt length “ ” 60 65
mm (in) (2.36) (2.56)
Tightening torque 35 75
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) (3.6, 26) (7.7, 55)
WCIA0505E
• Align the positions of bolts for drive plate with those of the torque
converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts
with the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the
front of the engine.
• After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft
several turns and check to be sure that transmission rotates
freely without binding.
• When replacing an engine or transmission you must make
sure the dowels are installed correctly during re-assembly.
LCIA0335E
• Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause
vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drive train components.
• After completing installation, check fluid leakage, fluid level, and the positions of A/T. Refer to TM-269,
"Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF)", TM-285, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Removal and Installation for VQ40DE 2WD Models INFOID:0000000009480690
CAUTION:
• When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
tector".
6. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the A/T
assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Do not disassemble.
• Do not allow metal filings or debris to get on the sensor's
front edge magnetic area.
• Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.
9. Remove the starter. LCIA0367E

10. Remove the rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-163, "Removal and Installation" (3S1330), DLN-174,
"Removal and Installation" (3S1330-2BJ100). A
11. Remove the left and right front exhaust tubes. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation".
12. Remove the shift selector control cable and bracket from the A/T.
13. Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler tubes from the A/T assembly. B
CAUTION:
Do not reuse copper sealing washers.
14. Remove the dust cover from the converter housing. C
15. Turn the crankshaft to access and remove the four bolts for the
drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION: TM
from the front of the engine.
16. Support the A/T assembly using a transmission jack. E
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow
17. Remove the nuts securing the insulator to the crossmember. F
G
20. Disconnect the A/T assembly harness connector.
21. Remove the wiring harness from the retainers. H
22. Remove the A/T fluid indicator pipe.
23. Remove the A/T assembly to engine bolts using power tool.
24. Remove A/T assembly from the vehicle using Tool. I

CAUTION: J
• Secure the A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
NOTE: K
The actual special service Tool may differ from Tool shown.
SCIA0499E L
INSPECTION
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter M
• After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to
N
Dimension (A) : 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more
P
SAT017B
INSTALLATION
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the
following.

• When installing transmission to the engine, tighten the bolts to the
specified torque using sequence shown.
Transmission bolts : 75 N·m (7.6 kg-m, 55 ft-lb)
LCIA0370E
CAUTION:
LCIA0335E
• Install crankshaft position sensor (POS).
Removal and Installation for VQ40DE 4WD Models INFOID:0000000009480691
CAUTION:
• When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
tector".
6. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the A/T
assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not allow metal filings or debris to get on the sensor's
front edge magnetic area.
7. Remove the air dam.
8. Remove the front and rear engine under cover using power tool.
9. Remove the front crossmember using power tool. LCIA0367E

10. Remove the starter motor.
11. Remove the front and rear propeller shafts. Refer to DLN-134, "Removal and Installation" (2F1310), DLN- A
143, "Removal and Installation" (2S1330) or (3S1330-2BJ100) DLN-174, "Removal and Installation".
12. Remove the left and right front exhaust tubes. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation".
13. Remove the shift selector control cable and bracket from the A/T. B
14. Disconnect the fluid cooler tubes from the A/T assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse copper sealing washers. C
15. Remove the dust cover from the converter housing.
16. Turn the crankshaft to access and remove the four bolts for the
drive plate and torque converter. TM
CAUTION:
from the front of the engine. E
17. Support the A/T assembly using a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow
F
G
21. Disconnect the following: H
• A/T assembly harness connector
• 4LO switch harness connector
• Wait detection switch harness connector
• ATP switch harness connector I
• Transfer control device harness connector
22. Remove the wiring harness from the retainers.
23. Remove the A/T fluid indicator pipe. J
24. Remove the A/T assembly to engine bolts using power tool.
25. Remove A/T assembly with transfer from the vehicle using Tool.
K
CAUTION: L
• Secure the A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
NOTE:
The actual special service Tool may differ from Tool shown. M
26. Remove the transfer from the A/T assembly. Refer to DLN-101,
"Removal and Installation".
SCIA2203E
N
INSPECTION
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
• After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to O
Dimension (A) : 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more P
SAT017B

INSTALLATION
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal, while paying attention to the fol-
lowing.
• When installing transmission to the engine, tighten the bolts to the
specified torque using sequence shown.
Transmission bolts : 75 N·m (7.6 kg-m, 55 ft-lb)
LCIA0370E
CAUTION:
LCIA0335E
• Install crankshaft position sensor (POS).

OVERHAUL
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [5AT: RE5R05A]

OVERHAUL
Exploded View INFOID:0000000009480692
B
TM
SCIA7040E

OVERHAUL
1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring

4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter
7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race
10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly
13. Needle bearing 14. Snap ring 15. Front sun gear
16. 3rd one-way clutch 17. Snap ring 18. Bearing race
19. Needle bearing 20. Seal ring 21. Input clutch assembly
22. Needle bearing 23. Rear internal gear 24. Brake band
25. Mid carrier assembly 26. Needle bearing 27. Bearing race
28. Rear carrier assembly 29. Needle bearing 30. Mid sun gear
31. Seal ring 32. Rear sun gear 33. 1st one-way clutch
34. Snap ring 35. Needle bearing 36. High and low reverse clutch hub
37. Snap ring 38. Bearing race 39. Needle bearing
: Apply Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-21, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Refer to GI-4, "Component" for symbols not described on the above.

OVERHAUL
TM
WCIA0575E
P
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. High and low reverse clutch assembly
4. Needle bearing 5. Direct clutch assembly 6. Reverse brake dish plate
7. Reverse brake driven plate 8. N-spring 9. Reverse brake drive plate
10. Reverse brake retaining plate 11. Snap ring 12. D-ring
13. D-ring 14. Reverse brake piston 15. Return spring

OVERHAUL
16. Spring retainer 17. Snap ring
Refer to GI-4, "Component" for symbols in the figure.
2WD Models
JSDIA2264GB
1. Self-sealing bolt 2. Bracket 3. Bracket

4. Rear oil seal 5. Rear extension 6. Parking actuator support
7. Parking pawl 8. Return spring 9. Pawl shaft
10. Seal ring 11. Needle bearing 12. Output speed sensor

OVERHAUL
13. Parking gear 14. Output shaft 15. Bearing race
16. Needle bearing 17. Manual plate 18. Parking rod A
19. Manual shaft oil seal 20. Manual shaft 21. O-ring
22. Band servo anchor end pin 23. Detent spring 24. Spacer
25. Seal ring 26. Return spring 27. O-ring B
28. Servo assembly 29. Snap ring 30. Snap ring
31. Sub-harness 32. Control valve with TCM 33. Bracket
34. O-ring 35. Plug 36. Oil pan C
37. Magnet 38. Oil pan bolt 39. Drain plug
40. Drain plug gasket 41. Oil pan gasket 42. Terminal cord assembly
43. O-ring 44. Retaining pin 45. Transmission case
TM
A. Tightening must be done following the assembly procedure. Refer to TM-379, "Assembly (2)".
*: Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent.
E

OVERHAUL
4WD Models
JSDIA2265GB
1. Rear oil seal 2. Bracket 3. Adapter case

4. Parking actuator support 5. Parking pawl 6. Return spring
7. Pawl shaft 8. Self-sealing bolt 9. Seal ring
10. Needle bearing 11. Gasket 12. Output speed sensor
13. Parking gear 14. Output shaft 15. Bearing race
16. Needle bearing 17. Manual plate 18. Parking rod

OVERHAUL
19. Manual shaft oil seal 20. Manual shaft 21. O-ring
22. Band servo anchor end pin 23. Detent spring 24. Spacer A
25. Seal ring 26. Snap ring 27. Return spring
28. O-ring 29. Servo assembly 30. Snap ring
31. Sub-harness 32. Control valve with TCM 33. Bracket B
34. O-ring 35. Plug 36. Oil pan
37. Magnet 38. Oil pan bolt 39. Drain plug
40. Drain plug gasket 41. Oil pan gasket 42. Terminal cord assembly C
43. O-ring 44. Retaining pin 45. Transmission case
A. Tightening must be done following the assembly procedure. Refer to TM-379, "Assembly (2)".
TM

OVERHAUL
Oil Channel INFOID:0000000009480693
2WD Models
SCIA5185E

OVERHAUL
4WD Models
A
TM
SCIA5189E

OVERHAUL
Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings
INFOID:0000000009480694
2WD Models
SCIA7019E

OVERHAUL
4WD Models
A
TM
SCIA7020E

DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble parts behind Drum Support. Refer to TM-132, "Cross-Sectional View".
1. Drain A/T fluid through drain plug.
2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while
pulling straight out.
SCIA5010E
3. Check torque converter one-way clutch using a check tool as

shown.
a. Insert a check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
b. While holding bearing support with a check tool, rotate one-way
clutch spline using suitable tool.
c. Make sure that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace
torque converter assembly.
SCIA3171E
4. Remove bolts and converter housing from transmission case.

CAUTION:
Do not scratch converter housing.
• Self-sealing bolt (A)
WCIA0662E

DISASSEMBLY
5. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly.
CAUTION: A
SCIA5011E
TM
6. Remove oil pump assembly to transmission case bolts.
G
SCIA2300E
7. Remove the oil pump assembly evenly from the transmission

H
case using Tools.
Tool number : ST25850000 (J-25721-A)

I
CAUTION:
• Fully tighten the sliding hammer screws.
• Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump
assembly edge surface. J
N
SCIA5474E
8. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly. O

CAUTION:
P
SCIA5172E

DISASSEMBLY
9. Remove bearing race from oil pump assembly.
SCIA6529E
10. Remove needle bearing from front sun gear.
SCIA2808E
11. Remove front sun gear assembly from front carrier assembly.
NOTE:
Remove front sun gear by rotating it left and right.
SCIA5014E
12. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly.
SCIA2470E
13. Remove front carrier assembly (with input clutch assembly and
rear internal gear) from rear carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not remove it with needle bearing.
SCIA5015E

DISASSEMBLY
14. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case. A
SCIA6512E
TM
15. Remove brake band from transmission case.
G
SCIA2580E
CAUTION: H
• To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not
stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown. I
• Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or
burns.
J
K
SAT655
16. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a L

unit.
SCIA5017E O

DISASSEMBLY
17. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly.
SCIA5697E
18. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly.
SCIA2805E
19. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly.
SCIA2804E
20. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly.
SCIA5175E
21. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly.
SCIA2803E

DISASSEMBLY
22. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly and
high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit. A
CAUTION:
Remove them with bearing race and needle bearing.
B
SCIA5018E
TM
23. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from direct clutch
assembly.
CAUTION: E
Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high and
low reverse clutch assembly edge surface.
F
G
SCIA2306E
24. Remove needle bearing from drum support. H
SCIA5198E K
25. Remove direct clutch assembly from reverse brake.

L
SCIA5019E
26. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. O
SCIA5021E

DISASSEMBLY
27. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
Do not damage connector.
SCIA5022E
28. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to TM-286, "Removal and Installation".
29. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of

malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con-
tains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band)
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to TM-272, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning".
SCIA5199E
30. Remove magnets from oil pan.
SCIA5200E
31. If an A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 is attached, disconnect the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector
as shown below.
a. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A).
CAUTION:
b. Straighten terminal clips ( ) to free terminal cord assembly and
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.
SCIA8124E

DISASSEMBLY
32. Disconnect output speed sensor connector (1).
CAUTION: A
JSDIA1319ZZ
TM
33. Straighten terminal clip ( ) to free output speed sensor har-
ness.
E
G
JSDIA1320ZZ
34. Remove bolts (A), (B) and (C) from control valve with TCM.
H

A 42 (1.65) 5 I
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1
J
SCIA5025E
K
35. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and L
manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
SCIA5260E
36. Remove the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 or plug as shown below. O
a. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2

DISASSEMBLY
i. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from con-
trol valve with TCM.
SCIA5253E
ii. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
SCIA5264E
b. Plug
i. Remove plug (1) with bracket (2) from control valve with TCM.
JSDIA1311ZZ
ii. Remove bracket (1) from plug (2).
JSDIA1312ZZ

DISASSEMBLY
iii. Remove O-ring (1) from plug (2).
CAUTION: A
JSDIA1313ZZ
TM
37. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION:
E
G
SCIA5155E
38. Disconnect TCM connectors.

H
CAUTION:
Do not damage connectors.
SCIA5447E
K
39. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve
with TCM using suitable tool.
L
N
SCIA5448E
40. Disconnect TCM connector (1) and transmission range switch O

connector (2).
CAUTION:
Do not damage connectors. P
JSDIA1317ZZ

DISASSEMBLY
41. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models) according to
the following procedures.
a. 2WD models
i. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.
• Bracket (1)
• Bracket (2)
• Self-sealing bolts (3)
• Bolt (A)
JSDIA0293ZZ
ii. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.
SCIA5028E
iii. Remove rear extension assembly (with needle bearing) from

transmission case.
SCIA5029E

DISASSEMBLY
b. 4WD models
i. Remove adapter case to transmission case bolts and terminal A
bracket (2).
• ; Front (1)
• Self-sealing bolt (3) B
TM
G
SCIA7220E
ii. Tap adapter case assembly using suitable tool.

H
SCIA5201E
K
iii. Remove adapter case assembly (with needle bearing) from
transmission case.
L
N
SCIA5186E
iv. Remove gasket from transmission case. O
SCIA5231E

DISASSEMBLY
42. Remove bearing race from output shaft.
SCIA5245E
43. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left and
right.
SCIA5030E
44. Remove parking gear from output shaft.
SCIA5247E
45. Remove seal rings from output shaft.
SCIA5209E
46. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.
SCIA5031E

DISASSEMBLY
47. Remove output speed sensor (1) from transmission case.
A
: Bolt
CAUTION:
B
• Do not allow metal filings or any foreign material to get on
the sensor's front edge magnetic area. C
JSDIA1321ZZ
TM
48. Remove reverse brake snap ring using two flat-bladed screw-
drivers.
NOTE: E
Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gap
using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using a another
screwdriver.
F
49. Remove reverse brake retaining plate from transmission case.
• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary,
replace the plate.
G
SCIA5032E
50. Remove N-spring from transmission case. H
SCIA5214E K
51. Remove reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate
from transmission case.
• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, L
replace the plate.
SCIA2322E
52. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. O
SCIA2323E

DISASSEMBLY
53. Remove spring retainer and return spring from transmission
case.
SCIA2324E
54. Remove seal rings from drum support.
SCIA3333E
55. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface.
SCIA2796E
56. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case using

compressed air. Refer to TM-320, "Oil Channel".
CAUTION:
Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes the
piston incline, and as a result, it becomes hard to disas-
semble the pistons.
SCIA5047E

DISASSEMBLY
57. Remove D-rings from reverse brake piston.
A
SCIA6330E
TM
58. Knock out retaining pin using suitable tool.
G
SCIA2328E
59. Remove manual shaft retaining pin using suitable tool. H
SCIA2329E K
60. Remove manual plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft.
L
SCIA5715E
61. Remove parking rod from manual plate. O
SCIA5220E

DISASSEMBLY
62. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.
SCIA5716E
63. Remove manual shaft oil seals using suitable tool.

CAUTION:
Do not scratch transmission case.
SCIA2331E
64. Remove detent spring and spacer from transmission case.
SCIA5248E
65. Remove snap ring from transmission case using suitable tool.
SCIA2333E
66. Remove servo assembly (with return spring) from transmission

case.
SCIA5679E

DISASSEMBLY
67. Remove return spring from servo assembly.
A
SCIA5717E
TM
68. Remove O-rings from servo assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings. E
G
SCIA5719E
69. Remove needle bearing (1) from rear extension (2WD models) H
or adapter case (4WD models).
SCIA6179J K
70. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension (2WD

models) or adapter case (4WD models).
L
SCIA3423E
71. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from O
rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models).
SCIA3424E

DISASSEMBLY
72. Remove return spring (1) from parking pawl (2).
SCIA6180J
73. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension (2WD models) or
adapter case (4WD models) using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch rear extension (2WD models) or adapter
case (4WD models).
SCIA5272E

OIL PUMP
OIL PUMP
A
Oil Pump B
TM
SCIA5227E
H
1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring
4. Oil pump housing 5. Oil pump housing oil seal
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000009480697

I
DISASSEMBLY
J
1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover.
M
SCIA5228E
2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using suitable tool.

CAUTION: N
Do not scratch oil pump housing.
SCIA2840E

OIL PUMP
3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.
CAUTION:
SCIA2841E
4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover.
SCIA5230E
ASSEMBLY
1. Install O-ring to oil pump cover.
CAUTION:
SCIA5230E
2. Install O-ring to oil pump housing.

CAUTION:
SCIA2841E

OIL PUMP
3. Install oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump housing until it is
flush using Tool. A
Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082)

CAUTION: B
• Do not reuse oil seal.
• Apply ATF to oil seal.
C
SCIA5313E
TM
4. After temporarily tightening the bolts for the oil pump housing to
the oil pump cover, tighten them to the specified torque in the
sequence shown.
E
Oil pump housing bolts : 9.0 N·m (0.92 kg-m, 80 in-lb.)
G
SCIA6329E

FRONT SUN GEAR, 3RD ONE-WAY CLUTCH
SCIA3114E
1. Front sun gear 2. 3rd one-way clutch 3. Snap ring
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000009480699
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove snap ring from front sun gear using suitable tool.
SCIA3110E
2. Remove 3rd one-way clutch from front sun gear.
SCIA3111E
INSPECTION
3rd One-way Clutch
• Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 3rd one-way clutch.

Front Sun Gear Snap Ring
• Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. A
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
Front Sun Gear B
• Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front sun gear. C
ASSEMBLY
1. Install 3rd one-way clutch in front sun gear.
CAUTION: TM
Apply ATF to 3rd one-way clutch.
SCIA3111E
G
2. Install snap ring in front sun gear using suitable tool.
J
SCIA3110E
3. Check operation of 3rd one-way clutch. K

a. Hold oil pump assembly and turn front sun gear.
b. Check 3rd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions. L
CAUTION:
If not as shown, check installation direction of 3rd one-way
clutch.
M
N
SCIA3131E

FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear INFOID:0000000009480700
COMPONENTS
SCIA6734E
1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing

4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Needle bearing
7. Snap ring 8. Snap ring 9. Retaining plate
10. Driven plate 11. Input clutch drum 12. Drive plate
DISASSEMBLY

1. Compress snap ring using suitable tools.
2. Remove front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly from A
rear internal gear.
3. Remove front carrier assembly from input clutch assembly.
B
SCIA5339E
TM
a. Remove bearing race from front carrier assembly.
G
SCIA2847E
b. Remove needle bearing from front carrier assembly. H
SCIA5233E K
c. Remove snap ring from front carrier assembly.

CAUTION: L
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
SCIA5476E
O
4. Disassemble input clutch assembly.
a. Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly.
P
SCIA5235E

b. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly.
SCIA2853E
c. Remove snap ring from input clutch drum using suitable tools.
d. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from input
clutch drum.
SCIA2864E
INSPECTION
Front Carrier Snap Ring
CAUTION:
Input Clutch Snap Ring
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drum
• Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns.
CAUTION:
Input Clutch Drive Plates
• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
Input Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
CAUTION:
Front Carrier
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front carrier assembly.
Rear Internal Gear
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear internal gear assembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install input clutch.

a. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in input clutch drum.
CAUTION: A
Take care with order of plates.
• QR25DE models
- Snap ring (1)
B
- Retaining plate (2)
- Drive plate (3)
- Driven plate (4)
- Drive plate/Driven plate: 5/5 C
TM
JSDIA2285ZZ
E
• VQ40DE models
- Snap ring (1)
- Drive plate (3) F
- Driven plate (4)
- Drive plate/Driven plate: 7/7
G
H
SCIA7133E
b. Install snap ring in input clutch drum using suitable tool.

I
SCIA2864E
L
c. Install needle bearing in input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. M
O
SCIA2853E

d. Install O-ring and seal rings in input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring and seal rings.
• Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
SCIA5235E
2. Install front carrier assembly.

a. Install snap ring to front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
SCIA5476E
b. Install needle bearing in front carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
• Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer to
TM-322, "Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings".
• Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
SCIA5233E
c. Install bearing race in front carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
d. Install front carrier assembly to input clutch assembly.
SCIA2847E
3. Compress snap ring using suitable tools.

4. Install front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly to rear
internal gear.
SCIA5339E

MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB
MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
A
HUB
Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub INFOID:0000000009480701
B
COMPONENTS
C
TM
SCIA2851E
H
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring

4. High and low reverse clutch hub 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring I
7. 1st one-way clutch 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring
10. Mid sun gear
J
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove needle bearing and bearing race from high and low
reverse clutch hub.
K
SCIA2854E
N
2. Remove snap ring from mid sun gear assembly using suitable
tool.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively. O
SCIA2855E

3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear
assembly.
SCIA2856E
a. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub.
SCIA2857E
4. Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly.
SCIA7018E
a. Remove snap ring from rear sun gear using suitable tool.
SCIA2859E

b. Remove 1st one-way clutch from rear sun gear.
A
SCIA4633E
TM
5. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear.
G
SCIA2861E
INSPECTION H
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring
CAUTION: I
1st One-way Clutch
• Check frictional surface for wear or damage. J
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 1st one-way clutch.
Mid Sun Gear K
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the mid sun gear. L
Rear Sun Gear
CAUTION: M
If necessary, replace the rear sun gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub
• Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. N
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the high and low reverse clutch hub.
ASSEMBLY O

1. Install seal rings to mid sun gear.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse seal rings.
SCIA2861E
2. Install 1st one-way clutch to rear sun gear.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to 1st one-way clutch.
SCIA4633E
3. Install snap ring to rear sun gear using suitable tool.
SCIA2859E
4. Install rear sun gear assembly to mid sun gear assembly.
SCIA7018E
5. Install needle bearing to high and low reverse clutch hub.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA2857E

6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub to mid sun gear assem-
bly. A
SCIA2856E
TM
7. Install snap ring to mid sun gear assembly using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively. E
G
SCIA2855E
8. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch. H

a. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
b. Check 1st one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions. I
CAUTION:
If not as shown, check installation direction of 1st one-way
clutch.
J
SCIA3132E K
9. Install needle bearing and bearing race to high and low reverse
clutch hub.
CAUTION: L
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing and bearing race.
SCIA2854E

HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
High and Low Reverse Clutch INFOID:0000000009480702
COMPONENTS
SCIA5239E
1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate
4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Bearing race
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove bearing race from high and low reverse clutch drum.
SCIA5215E
2. Remove snap ring from high and low reverse clutch drum using
suitable tool.
3. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from high
and low reverse clutch drum.
SCIA2868E
INSPECTION
• Check the following, and replace high and low reverse clutch assembly if necessary.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring
High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates

High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates A
ASSEMBLY B
1. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in high and low reverse clutch drum.
CAUTION:
Take care with the order of plates.
C
• QR25DE models
- Snap ring (1)
- Drive plate (3) TM
- Driven plate (4)
E
F
SCIA6735E
• VQ40DE models
G
- Snap ring (1)
- Drive plate (3)
- Driven plate (4) H
SCIA7134E
J
2. Install snap ring in high and low reverse clutch drum using suit-
able tool.
K
M
SCIA2868E
3. Install bearing race to high and low reverse clutch drum. N

CAUTION:
O
SCIA5215E

DIRECT CLUTCH
DIRECT CLUTCH
Direct Clutch INFOID:0000000009480703
COMPONENTS
QR25DE Models
SCIA7128E
1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate

4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate
VQ40DE Models
JSDIA1949ZZ
1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate

4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Dish plate
DISASSEMBLY

DIRECT CLUTCH
1. Remove snap ring from direct clutch drum using suitable tool.
2. Remove retaining plate, drive plates, driven plates and dish A
plate* from direct clutch drum.
*: VQ40DE models only
B
SCIA2868E
TM
INSPECTION
• Check the following, and replace direct clutch assembly if necessary.
E
Direct Clutch Snap Ring
Direct Clutch Drive Plates
F
Direct Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates
• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. G
Direct Clutch Dish Plate (VQ40DE Models)
H
ASSEMBLY
1. Install retaining plate, drive plates, driven plates and dish plate* in direct clutch drum.
*: VQ40DE models only
CAUTION: I
• QR25DE Models
- Snap ring (1) J
- Drive plate (3)
- Driven plate (4)
- Drive plate/Driven plate: 5/5 K
SCIA7134E
M
• VQ40DE Models
- Snap ring (1)
- Retaining plate (2) N
- Drive plate (3)
- Driven plate (4)
- Dish plate (5)
- Drive plate/Driven plate: 5/5 O
P
JSDIA1919ZZ

DIRECT CLUTCH
2. Install snap ring in direct clutch drum using suitable tool.
SCIA2868E

ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
A
Assembly (1) INFOID:0000000009480704
1. Drive manual shaft oil seals into the transmission case until they B
are flush using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seals.
C
• Do not reuse manual shaft oil seals.
TM
SCIA5259E E
2. Install detent spring and spacer in transmission case and secure

with the bolt.
F
Bolt : 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)
SCIA5248E
3. Install manual shaft to transmission case. I
L
SCIA5716E
4. Install parking rod to manual plate.

M
SCIA5220E

ASSEMBLY
5. Install manual plate (with parking rod) to manual shaft.
SCIA5715E
6. Install retaining pin into the manual plate and manual shaft.
a. Align pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft
b. Tap the retaining pin into the manual plate using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm (0.08±0.020 in) over the
manual plate.
SCIA5297E
7. Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft.
a. Align pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual
shaft using suitable tool.
b. Tap the retaining pin into the transmission case using suitable
tool.
CAUTION:
• Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm (0.20±0.04 in) over the trans-
mission case.
SCIA2427E
8. Install O-rings to servo assembly.

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply petroleum jelly to O-rings.
SCIA5719E
9. Install return spring to servo assembly.
SCIA5717E

ASSEMBLY
10. Install servo assembly in transmission case.
A
SCIA5679E
TM
11. Install snap ring to transmission case using suitable tool.
G
SCIA2333E
12. Install D-rings in reverse brake piston. H

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse D-rings.
• Apply ATF to D-rings.
I
SCIA6330E K
13. Install reverse brake piston in transmission case.

L
SCIA2325E
14. Install needle bearing to drum support edge surface. O

CAUTION:
P
SCIA2796E

ASSEMBLY
15. Install seal rings to drum support.
CAUTION:
SCIA3333E
16. Install spring retainer and return spring in transmission case.
SCIA2324E
17. Install snap ring in transmission case while compressing return

spring using Tool.
Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)

CAUTION:
Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver so
that snap ring tension is slightly weak.
SCIA5877E
18. Install reverse brake drive plates driven plates and dish plates in transmission case.
CAUTION:

ASSEMBLY
• QR25DE models
- Snap ring (1) A
- Drive plate (3)
- Driven plate (4)
B
- Dish plate (5)
- Drive plate/Driven plate:5/6
TM
G
JSDIA2359ZZ
• VQ40DE models H
- Snap ring (1)
- Drive plate (3)
- Driven plate (4) I
- Dish plate (5)
- Drive plate/Driven plate:6/6
J
SCIA6949E
K
19. Assemble N-spring.
20. Install reverse brake retaining plate in transmission case.
L
SCIA5249E

ASSEMBLY
21. Install snap ring in transmission case.
SCIA2439E
22. Measure clearance (A) between retaining plate and snap ring. If
not within specified clearance, select proper retaining plate.
Clearance “A” : 0.7 - 1.1mm (0.028 - 0.043 in)

Retaining plate : Refer to TM-388, "Reverse
brake".
SCIA3129E
23. Install needle bearing to transmission case.

CAUTION:
• Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer to
TM-322, "Location of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings".
• Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA5031E
24. Install output speed sensor (1) to transmission case and tighten
bolt to specified torque.
: Bolt
Output speed sensor bolt : 5.8 N·m (0.59 kg-m, 51 in-lb)

CAUTION:
• Do not subject sensor to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Do not disassemble sensor.
• Do not allow metal filings or any foreign material to get on JSDIA1321ZZ
the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
• Do not place sensor in an area affected by magnetism.

ASSEMBLY
25. Install new rear oil seal until it is flush into the rear extension
case (2WD models) using Tool or adapter case (4WD models) A
Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082) B

CAUTION:
• Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
• Do not reuse rear oil seal. C
TM
G
WCIA0475E
26. Install return spring (1) to parking pawl (2).

H
SCIA6180J
K
27. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rear
extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models).
L
N
SCIA3424E
28. Install parking actuator support to rear extension (2WD models) O

or adapter case (4WD models).
SCIA3423E

ASSEMBLY
29. Install needle bearing (1) to rear extension (2WD models) or
adapter case (4WD models).
CAUTION:
SCIA6179J
30. Install seal rings to output shaft.

CAUTION:
SCIA5209E
31. Install parking gear to output shaft.
SCIA5247E
32. Install output shaft in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Do not mistake front of shaft for rear because both sides
look similar (thinner end is front side).
SCIA5030E
33. Install bearing race to output shaft.
SCIA5245E

ASSEMBLY
34. Install rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models) according to the
following procedures. A
a. 2WD models
i. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket
or equivalent. Refer to GI-21, "Recommended Chemical Prod- B
ucts and Sealants".) to rear extension assembly as shown.
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil, old sealant and any C
foreign material from the transmission case and rear exten-
sion assembly mating surfaces.
TM
SCIA5212E
ii. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case. E

CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear
F
extension assembly.
SCIA5029E H
iii. Install the bracket (1), (2) and rear extension assembly bolts and
tighten to the specified torque. I
• Self sealing bolt (3)
• Bolt (A)
Rear extension : 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb) J

assembly bolt
Self-sealing bolt : 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)
K
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt. JSDIA0293ZZ
L
b. 4WD models
i. Install gasket onto transmission case.
CAUTION:
• Completely remove all moisture, oil, old gasket and any M
foreign material from the transmission case and adapter
case assembly mating surfaces.
• Do not reuse gasket. N
O
SCIA5231E

ASSEMBLY
ii. Install adapter case assembly to transmission case.
CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear
extension assembly.
SCIA5186E
iii. Tighten adapter case assembly to specified torque.

• 1:
• 2: Brackets
• 3: Self-sealing bolts
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt (2).
Adapter case : 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)

assembly bolt
Self-sealing bolt : 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)
SCIA7220E
35. Install direct clutch assembly in reverse brake.

CAUTION:
Make sure that drum support edge surface and direct clutch
inner boss edge surface come to almost same place.
SCIA5019E
36. Install needle bearing in drum support.

CAUTION:
SCIA5198E

ASSEMBLY
37. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly in direct clutch.
A
SCIA2306E
TM
38. Align the drive plate using suitable tool.
G
SCIA3169E
39. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly
H
and rear sun gear assembly as a unit.
SCIA5018E
K
CAUTION:
Make sure that portion “A” of high and low reverse clutch L
drum protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond por-
tion “B” of rear sun gear.
SCIA3130E
O

ASSEMBLY
40. Install needle bearing in rear carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
SCIA2803E
41. Install bearing race in rear carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
SCIA5175E
42. Install rear carrier assembly in direct clutch drum.
SCIA2462E
43. Install needle bearing (rear side) to mid carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
SCIA2804E
44. Install needle bearing (front side) to mid carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
SCIA2805E

ASSEMBLY
45. Install mid carrier assembly in rear carrier assembly.
A
SCIA5017E
TM
46. Install front carrier assembly, input clutch assembly and rear
internal gear as a unit.
E
G
SCIA5015E
47. Install seal rings in input clutch assembly. H

CAUTION:
I
SCIA2470E K
48. Install band servo anchor end pin and lock nut in transmission
case.
CAUTION: L
Do not reuse band servo anchor end pin.
SCIA6512E
49. Install brake band in transmission case. O

CAUTION:
Install it so that the identification to avoid incorrect installa-
tion faces the servo side. P
SCIA5498E

ASSEMBLY
50. Install front sun gear to front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to front sun gear bearing and 3rd one-way clutch
end bearing.
SCIA5014E
51. Install needle bearing to front sun gear.

CAUTION:
SCIA2808E
52. Adjust brake band tilting using a clip so that brake band contacts
front sun gear drum evenly.
SCIA5033E
53. Adjust brake band.

a. Loosen lock nut.
b. Tighten band servo anchor end pin to specified torque.
Anchor end pin : 5.0 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb)

c. Back off band servo anchor end pin three turns.
d. Holding band servo anchor end pin, tighten lock nut to specified
torque.
Lock nut : 46 N·m (4.7 kg-m, 34 ft-lb) SCIA5498E
Adjustment INFOID:0000000009480705
TOTAL END PLAY

ASSEMBLY
• Measure clearance between front sun gear and bearing race for oil
pump cover. A
• Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within
specifications.
B
SCIA2810E
TM
1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension
“J”.
E
G
SCIA5350E
a. Measure dimension “K”. H
K
SCIA5351E
b. Measure dimension “L”.

c. Calculate dimension “J”. L
“J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of

transmission case and needle bearing mating surface M
of front sun gear.
J=K–L
N
SCIA5352E
O
2. Measure dimensions “M1” and “M2” and then calculate dimen-
sion “M”.
P
SCIA3125E

ASSEMBLY
a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
SCIA3124E
b. Measure dimension “M1”.
SCIA3126E
c. Measure dimension “M2”.
SCIA3127E
d. Calculate dimension “M”.
“M”: Distance between transmission case fitting sur-

face of oil pump and needle bearing on oil pump.
M = M1– M2
SCIA3125E
3. Adjust total end play “T1”.
T1 = J – M
Total end play “T1” : 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
• Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play
is within specifications.
Bearing races :Refer to TM-388, "Total End Play".
SCIA2810E

ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) INFOID:0000000009480706

A
1. Install O-ring to oil pump assembly.

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring. B
TM
SCIA5172E
2. Install bearing race to oil pump assembly. E

CAUTION:
F
H
SCIA6529E
3. Install oil pump assembly in transmission case.

CAUTION: I
Apply ATF to oil pump bearing.
SCIA2811E
L
4. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or
equivalent. Refer to GI-21, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants".) to oil pump assembly as shown. M
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil, old sealant and any
foreign material from the oil pump bolts and oil pump bolt
mating surfaces. N
O
SCIA5321E

ASSEMBLY
5. Tighten oil pump bolts to specified torque.
Oil pump bolts : 48 N·m (4.9 kg-m, 35 ft-lb)

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump bushing.
SCIA2300E
6. Install O-ring to input clutch assembly.

CAUTION:
SCIA5011E
7. Install converter housing to transmission case and tighten bolts

to specified torque.
Converter housing bolt : 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)

Self-sealing bolt (A) : 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt (A).
WCIA0662E
8. Make sure that brake band (1) does not close input speed sen-
sor hole (A).
JSDIA1318ZZ
9. Connect TCM connector (1) and transmission range switch con-

nector (2).
JSDIA1317ZZ

ASSEMBLY
10. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with
TCM. A
SCIA5450E
TM
11. Connect TCM connectors.
G
SCIA5447E
12. Install O-ring to A/T assembly harness connector. H

CAUTION:
I
SCIA5155E K
13. Install new O-ring (1) in plug (2).

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring. L
• O-ring should be free of contamination.
M
JSDIA1313ZZ
14. Install plug (2) to bracket (1). O
JSDIA1312ZZ

ASSEMBLY
15. Install plug (1) [with bracket (2)] to control valve with TCM and
tighten bolt ( ) to specified torque.
Bracket bolt : 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

CAUTION:
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve.
JSDIA1311ZZ
16. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
1 : Brake band
CAUTION:
• Make sure that input speed sensor is securely installed
into input speed sensor hole (A).
• Hang down output speed sensor harness toward outside
so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
• Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve
with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.
JSDIA1318ZZ
• Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with

manual plate projection.
SCIA5035E
17. Install bolts (A), (B) and (C) to control valve with TCM.
: Front

A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1
SCIA8077E
18. Tighten bolt (A), (B) and (C) temporarily to prevent dislocation.
After that tighten them in order (A → B → C), and then tighten
other bolts.
: Front
Bolt symbol A B C
Number of bolts 5 6 1
Length mm (in) 42 (1.65) 55 (2.17) 40 (1.57)
SCIA8078E

ASSEMBLY
Tightening torque With ATF applied

7.9 (0.81, 70) A
N·m (km-g, in-lb) 7.9 (0.81, 70)
19. Connect output speed sensor connector (1).

B
TM
JSDIA1319ZZ
E
20. Securely fasten output speed sensor harness with terminal clip
( ).
F
H
JSDIA1320ZZ
21. Pull down A/T assembly harness connector.

I
CAUTION:
SCIA5299E
L
22. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector.
O
SCIA5300E

ASSEMBLY
23. Install magnets in oil pan.
SCIA5200E
24. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to TM-286, "Removal and Installation".
25. Install torque converter.
a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
NOTE:
• Approximately 2 liters (2-1/8 US qt. 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid is
required for a new torque converter.
• When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of
fluid as was drained.
SAT428DA
b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con-

verter with notches of oil pump.
CAUTION:
Install torque converter while rotating it.
SCIA5010E
c. Measure distance "A" to make sure that torque converter is in

proper position.
Distance "A" : 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more
SCIA5694E

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [5AT: RE5R05A]

B
Engine QR25DE VQ40DE

Applied model C
Axle 2WD 2WD/4WD
Automatic transmission model RE5R05A
Stall torque ratio 1.84 : 1 1.76 : 1 TM
1st 3.842
2nd 2.353
E
3rd 1.529
Transmission gear ratio
4th 1.000
5th 0.839 F
Reverse 2.765
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*1
Fluid capacity 10.3 liter (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 Imp qt) G
CAUTION:
If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used, Using automatic transmission
fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission H
durability, and may damage automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*1: Refer to MA-16, "FOR USA AND CANADA : Fluids and Lubricants" (United States and Canada) and MA-18, "FOR MEXICO : Fluids
and Lubricants" (Mexico). I
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000009480708
J
QR25DE MODELS
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position K
D1→D2 D2→D3 D3→D4 D4→D5 D5→D4 D4→D3 D3→D2 D2→D1
49 - 53 80 - 88 125-135 194 - 204 190 - 200 115 - 125 69 - 77 32 - 36
Full throttle
(30 - 33) (50 - 55) (78 - 84) (121 - 127) (118 - 124) (72 - 77) (43 - 48) (20 - 23)
L
36 - 40 59 - 65 91 - 99 127 - 135 99 - 107 63 - 71 44 - 50 11 - 15
Half throttle
(23 - 25) (37 - 44) (57 - 62) (79 - 83) (62 - 66) (39 - 44) (27 - 30) (7 - 9)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 1/2 of the full opening.
M
VQ40DE MODELS FOR 2WD
Final
Throttle
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) N
gear Tire size
position D1→D2 D2→D3 D3→D4 D4→D5 D5→D4 D4→D3 D3→D2 D2→D1
ratio
Full 68 - 72 109 - 117 169 - 179 249 - 259 245 - 255 157 - 167 95 - 103 43 - 47 O
throttle (43 - 44) (68 - 72) (106 - 111) (156 - 162) (153 - 158) (98 - 103) (60 - 64) (27 - 29)
2.937 P265/70R16
Half 54 - 58 88 - 94 137 - 145 165 - 175 137 - 145 77 - 85 54 - 60 11 - 15
throttle (34 - 36) (55 - 58) (86 - 90) (103 - 108) (86 - 90) (48 - 52) (34 - 38) (7 - 9)
P

Full 68 - 72 109 - 117 169 - 179 249 - 259 245 - 255 157 - 167 95 - 103 43 - 47
throttle (43 - 44) (68 - 72) (106 - 111) (156 - 162) (153 - 158) (98 - 103) (60 - 64) (27 - 29)
P265/75R16
Half 54 - 58 88 - 94 137 - 145 165 - 175 137 - 145 77 - 85 54 - 60 11 - 15
throttle (34 - 36) (55 - 58) (86 - 90) (103 - 108) (86 - 90) (48 - 52) (34 - 38) (7 - 9)
3.133
Full 62 - 66 100 - 108 156 - 166 241 - 251 237 - 247 145 - 155 88 - 96 42 - 46
P265/70R16 throttle (39 - 41) (63 - 67) (97 - 103) (150 - 155) (148 - 153) (91 - 96) (55 - 59) (27 - 28)
P265/60R18 Half 50 - 54 82 - 88 126 - 134 155 - 163 126 - 134 71 - 79 50 - 56 11 - 15
throttle (32 - 33) (51 - 54) (79 - 83) (97 - 101) (79 - 83) (45 - 49) (32 - 34) (7 - 9)
Final Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle
gear Tire size
position D1→D2 D2→D3 D3→D4 D4→D5 D5→D4 D4→D3 D3→D2 D2→D1
ratio
Full 62 - 66 100 - 108 156 - 166 241 - 251 237 - 247 145 - 155 88 - 96 42 - 46
throttle (39 - 41) (63 - 67) (97 - 103) (150 - 155) (148 - 153) (91 - 96) (55 - 59) (27 - 28)
3.133 P265/70R16
Half 50 - 54 82 - 88 126 - 134 155 - 163 126 - 134 71 - 79 50 - 56 11 - 15
throttle (32 - 33) (51 - 54) (79 - 83) (97 - 101) (79 - 83) (45 - 49) (32 - 34) (7 - 9)
Full 62 - 66 100 - 108 156 - 166 241 - 251 237 - 247 145 - 155 88 - 96 42 - 46
throttle (39 - 41) (63 - 67) (97 - 103) (150 - 155) (148 - 153) (91 - 96) (55 - 59) (27 - 28)
P265/75R16
Half 50 - 54 82 - 88 126 - 134 155 - 163 126 - 134 71 - 79 50 - 56 11 - 15
throttle (32 - 33) (51 - 54) (79 - 83) (97 - 101) (79 - 83) (45 - 49) (32 - 34) (7 - 9)
3.357
Full 59 - 63 95 - 103 147 - 157 228 - 238 224 - 234 137 - 147 83 - 91 40 - 44
P265/70R16 throttle (37 - 39) (59 - 64) (92 - 98) (143 - 149) (140 - 146) (86 - 92) (52 - 57) (25 - 27)
P265/60R18 Half 47 - 51 77 - 83 119 - 127 147 - 155 119 - 127 67 - 75 48 - 54 11 - 15
throttle (30 - 31) (48 - 51) (74 - 78) (92 - 96) (74 - 78) (42 - 46) (30 - 33) (7 - 9)
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000009480709
QR25DE MODELS
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Tire size Throttle position
Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF”
Closed throttle 76 - 84 (47 - 52) 73 - 81 (45 - 50)
P 235/75R15
Half throttle 161 - 169 (100 - 105) 127 - 135 (80 - 84)
Closed throttle 56 - 64 (35 - 40) 50 - 58 (31 - 36)
P265/70R16 Half throttle 161 - 169 (100 - 105) 99 - 107 (62 - 66)
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal: OFF)

Throttle po-
gear Tire size
sition Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF”
ratio
Closed
57 - 65 (36 - 40) 53 - 61 (33 - 37)
2.937 P265/70R16 throttle
Half throttle 182 - 190 (114 - 118) 137 - 145 (86 - 90)

Throttle po-
gear Tire size A
ratio
Closed
57 - 65 (36 - 40) 53 - 61 (33 - 37)
P265/75R16 throttle B
Half throttle 182 - 190 (114 - 118) 137 - 145 (86 - 90)
3.133
Closed
P265/70R16 52 - 60 (33 - 37) 49 - 57 (31 - 35)
throttle C
P265/60R18
Half throttle 172 - 180 (107 - 111) 126 - 134 (79 - 83)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 1/2 of the full opening. TM

E
Throttle po-
gear Tire size
ratio
Closed
F
52 - 60 (33 - 37) 49 - 57 (31 - 35)
3.133 P265/70R16 throttle
Half throttle 172 - 180 (107 - 111) 126 - 134 (79 - 83)
G
Closed
52 - 60 (33 - 37) 49 - 57 (31 - 35)
P265/75R16 throttle
Half throttle 172 - 180 (107 - 111) 126 - 134 (79 - 83)
3.357 H
Closed
P265/70R16 49 - 57 (31 - 35) 46 - 54 (29 - 33)
throttle
P265/60R18
Half throttle 163 - 171 (102 - 106) 119 - 127 (74 - 78)
I
J
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000009480710
Engine model QR25DE VQ40DE K

Stall speed 2,350 - 2,650 rpm 2,600 - 2,900 rpm
Line Pressure INFOID:0000000009480711

L
Line pressure [kPa (kg/cm2, psi)]

Engine speed M
“R” position “D” position
At idle speed 425 - 465 (4.3 - 4.7, 62 - 67) 379 - 428 (3.9 - 4.4, 55 - 62)
At stall speed 1,605 - 1,950 (16.4 - 19.9, 233 - 283) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.4 - 15.3, 190 - 218) N
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000009480712
O
Name Condition CONSULT “DATA MONITOR” (Approx.) (V) Resistance (Approx.) (kΩ)
0°C (32°F) 3.3 15
P
A/T fluid temperature sensor 1 20°C (68°F) 2.7 6.5
80°C (176°F) 0.9 0.9

Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000009480713
Data (Ap-
Name Condition
prox.)
Input speed sensor
When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th speed with the closed throttle position switch “OFF”.
1
1.3 (kHz)
Input speed sensor
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st speed with the closed throttle position switch “OFF”.
2
Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000009480714
Name Condition Data (Approx.)

Output speed sensor When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH). 185 (Hz)
Reverse brake INFOID:0000000009480715
QR25DE
Number of drive plates 5

Number of driven plates 6 (5+1)
Clearance [mm (in)] Standard 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043)
4.2 (0.165) 31667 90X14
4.4 (0.173) 31667 90X15
Thickness of retaining plates 4.6 (0.181) 31667 90X16
4.8 (0.189) 31667 90X17
5.0 (0.197) 31667 90X18
5.2 (0.205) 31667 90X19
VQ40DE
Number of drive plates 6

Number of driven plates 6
Clearance [mm (in)] Standard 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043)
4.2 (0.165) 31667 90X14
4.4 (0.173) 31667 90X15
Thickness of retaining plates 4.6 (0.181) 31667 90X16
4.8 (0.189) 31667 90X17
5.0 (0.197) 31667 90X18
5.2 (0.205) 31667 90X19
Total End Play INFOID:0000000009480716
Total end play mm (in) 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217)
BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY

Thickness mm (in) Part number* A

0.8 (0.031) 31435 95X00
1.0 (0.039) 31435 95X01
1.2 (0.047) 31435 95X02
B
1.4 (0.055) 31435 95X03
1.6 (0.063) 31435 95X04
1.8 (0.071) 31435 95X05
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. C
TM

Eje y Transmision

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Eje y Transmision

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Eje y Transmision

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 12 SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS ................... 35

Revision: May 2014 TM-1 2014 Frontier

DESCRIPTION ................................................... 63 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 128

M/T OIL .............................................................. 65 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 131

Revision: May 2014 TM-2 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-3 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-4 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-5 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-6 2014 Frontier

• Do not reuse transmission oil once it has been drained.

Revision: May 2014 TM-7 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-8 2014 Frontier

ST30031000 • Removing 1st and 2nd synchronizer as- F

ST33290001 Removing rear oil seal

ST33230000 Removing counter gear

KV38100300 • Removing counter gear front bearing (Use

Revision: May 2014 TM-9 2014 Frontier

ST33210000 • Installing counter gear front bearing

ST30613000 Installing main drive gear bearing

ST37750000 • Removing counter gear rear bearing

ST22452000 Installing reverse synchronizer hub

— Installing mainshaft and counter gear (Use

— Installing mainshaft and counter gear (Use

Revision: May 2014 TM-10 2014 Frontier

— Removing and installing mainshaft rear bear- TM

— Removing trim components

Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts O

Revision: May 2014 TM-11 2014 Frontier

CHECK PLUG RETURN SPRING AND CHECK BALL (Worn or damaged)

BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)

INSERT SPRING (Damaged)

GEAR (Worn or damaged)

SHIFT FORK (Worn)

Revision: May 2014 TM-12 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-13 2014 Frontier

Oil grade and Viscosity:

OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL

Revision: May 2014 TM-14 2014 Frontier

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405)

Revision: May 2014 TM-15 2014 Frontier

BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH

Gear position Continuity

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Gear position Continuity

Revision: May 2014 TM-16 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-17 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-18 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-19 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-20 2014 Frontier

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

1. Breather hose 2. Transmission assembly 3. Dust cover

Revision: May 2014 TM-21 2014 Frontier

Revision: May 2014 TM-22 2014 Frontier

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A

Revision: May 2014 TM-23 2014 Frontier

1. Back-up lamp switch 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 3. Clip